WO2023272485A1 - Control method, image capture apparatus, and image capture system - Google Patents

Control method, image capture apparatus, and image capture system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023272485A1
WO2023272485A1 PCT/CN2021/103091 CN2021103091W WO2023272485A1 WO 2023272485 A1 WO2023272485 A1 WO 2023272485A1 CN 2021103091 W CN2021103091 W CN 2021103091W WO 2023272485 A1 WO2023272485 A1 WO 2023272485A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
focus
focal length
information
lens
focus information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/103091
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
吴军
Original Assignee
深圳市大疆创新科技有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 深圳市大疆创新科技有限公司 filed Critical 深圳市大疆创新科技有限公司
Priority to CN202180095735.5A priority Critical patent/CN117015975A/en
Priority to PCT/CN2021/103091 priority patent/WO2023272485A1/en
Publication of WO2023272485A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023272485A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/60Control of cameras or camera modules
    • H04N23/67Focus control based on electronic image sensor signals
    • H04N23/675Focus control based on electronic image sensor signals comprising setting of focusing regions
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/60Control of cameras or camera modules
    • H04N23/63Control of cameras or camera modules by using electronic viewfinders
    • H04N23/633Control of cameras or camera modules by using electronic viewfinders for displaying additional information relating to control or operation of the camera
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/60Control of cameras or camera modules
    • H04N23/69Control of means for changing angle of the field of view, e.g. optical zoom objectives or electronic zooming

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of control, and in particular to a control method, a photographing device and a photographing system.
  • Manual focus is to focus in steps by turning the zoom ring of the lens or pressing the direction keys on the body, so as to obtain a clear image of the target object.
  • manual focus can be a powerful complement to autofocus.
  • the operation convenience of manual focusing is relatively low, and the focusing accuracy is highly dependent on the user's focusing operation level and eyesight level.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a control method, a photographing device, and a photographing system to improve the convenience of manual focusing and reduce the dependence of focusing accuracy on the user's focusing operation level and vision level.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a control method applied to a photographing device, the method including: acquiring a focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image; obtaining a first operation, wherein the first The operation includes a zoom operation or the first operation is directed to the focus information in the focus information set; and in response to the first operation, the lens of the camera is controlled to automatically focus based on the focus information set.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a shooting control device, which includes: a lens for capturing images; one or more processors; a storage device for storing one or more computer programs, and the computer programs are stored in When executed by the processor, the above method is realized.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a photographing system, including: the above photographing device; and a supporting mechanism, which supports the photographing device.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a readable storage medium, on which a computer program is stored; when the computer program is executed, the control method as in the embodiment of the present application in the first aspect is implemented.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer program, including executable instructions, and when the executable instructions are executed, implement the above method.
  • in-focus information of one or more objects included in the focus frame is acquired.
  • the photographing device can automatically zoom to a focal length corresponding to certain focus information according to the focus information and the zoom trigger operation.
  • the in-focus information of the object included in the focus frame is automatically determined, so that only the zoom trigger operation or for a certain The zoom trigger operation of the in-focus information can realize autofocus based on the in-focus information.
  • the embodiment of the present application uses the automatic zoom technology to provide assistance to the manual zoom operation, which improves the convenience of manual focus and reduces the impact of focus accuracy on the user's focus operation level and vision level. Dependency, effectively improving the user's manual zoom experience.
  • FIG. 1 is an application scenario of a control method, a photographing device, and a photographing system provided in an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a photographing device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of adjusting the focal length by changing the distance between the lenses provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a lens provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a control method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 6 is a schematic diagram of the focal length and focus distance of the lens provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the focus frame, object and focus information provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the process of manual assisted focusing based on the zoom ring provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the process of manual assisted focusing based on the zoom ring provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the process of manually assisting focusing based on focus information provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of the in-focus intensity curve provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the processed in-focus intensity curve provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a process of manually assisting focusing based on focus information provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the preset key state and the corresponding display image on the display screen provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic flowchart of a control method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of an image displayed when exiting manual assisted focusing provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of a control method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of compensating focus information provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of compensating focus information provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing device provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • a component when a component is said to be “fixed” to another component, it can be directly on the other component or there can also be an intervening component.
  • the other component When a component is considered to be “carrying” another component, the other component may be carried on a surface of the component, or disposed within the component, or disposed within or on the surface of another component carried by the component.
  • a component When a component is said to be “connected” to another component, it may be directly connected to the other component or there may be intervening components at the same time.
  • a single-lens reflex camera can be configured with a zoom lens or a fixed-focus lens.
  • a zoom lens can have parameters such as follow focus, zoom, and aperture.
  • manual focus is a powerful supplement to auto focus (AF).
  • AF auto focus
  • MF is still an indispensable function in some application scenarios.
  • the manual focus method largely depends on the human eye's judgment on the image on the display screen or the sharpness of the object in the viewfinder.
  • the shooting effect is also related to the photographer's proficiency and even the photographer's vision.
  • Traditional single-lens reflex cameras and rangefinder cameras mostly use manual focus to complete the zoom operation.
  • a variety of quasi-professional and professional digital cameras, as well as SLR digital cameras, are equipped with manual focus functions to meet different shooting needs.
  • Manual focus can be divided into two types: electronic manual focus and full-time mechanical manual focus.
  • the electronic manual focus can be matched with a large aperture telephoto lens.
  • the electronic circuit of the electronic manual focus detects the amount of rotation of the zoom ring, and based on the amount of rotation, controls the motor to drive the lens group of the lens to zoom to a focal length corresponding to the amount of rotation.
  • Full-time mechanical manual focus does not require power consumption, and the lens group is driven to move through rollers and swivels different from AF.
  • the target object photographed under in-focus conditions can be clearly presented on the display screen, and the clarity can be judged by the user.
  • the camera body when using a manual focus lens, can give the user a reference focus indication when the focus condition is met.
  • the focusing screen will provide focusing aids such as Fresnel lens and split image, and can also be connected with an external viewfinder magnifying eyepiece, viewfinder magnifying glass, etc. to improve the accuracy of manual focus.
  • the manual focusing function of some automatic lenses is not realized by pure mechanical rotation transmission force, but has a stepping motor to drive the lens. When the user turns the zoom ring, the motor inside the lens will rotate almost synchronously with the user's rotation to drive the lens to focus.
  • the advantage of this method is that the structure is simple and the interior of the lens barrel is well sealed, but there will be a certain delay.
  • This technology can be used in large-aperture telephoto lenses or other lenses with a zoom ring.
  • the zoom ring only acts as a sensor and is not mechanically connected to the focusing lens group.
  • the simplified structure can make the lens smaller.
  • the lens used in the embodiment of the present application may include the above-mentioned stepping motor to realize manual assisted focusing. Of course, manual assisted focusing can also be achieved through an external motor.
  • manual focus can also be used when autofocus fails.
  • manual focus is required when the contrast of the scene is small, the contrast between the subject and the background is too large, the ambient brightness is low, the ambient brightness is too high, there is interference from a high-brightness light source, it needs to be shot through a transparent barrier such as glass, and the subject is outside the focus area.
  • Cameras with live view can easily use manual focus by zooming in on the image and achieve accurate focus.
  • the user needs to turn the zoom ring precisely to make the image of the target object in the image clear.
  • control method, photographing device, and photographing system provided in the embodiments of the present application can effectively improve the convenience of the user when performing manual focusing operations, reduce the dependence of manual focusing on the user's focusing experience and vision level, and improve user experience.
  • the control method, shooting device, and shooting system provided in the embodiments of the present application can automatically focus on the object in the focus frame when the positional relationship between the lens and the target object changes.
  • the focus information is compensated to improve the accuracy of the focus information.
  • the lens can be estimated through the measurement information output by the inertial measurement unit (IMU) (such as the original IMU on the camera or the gimbal or the external IMU), the rangefinder, etc.
  • IMU inertial measurement unit
  • the in-focus information is compensated according to the distance change amount. Allows novice users to capture clear images of the target object even in complex scenes such as scenes where the user is moving and/or the target object is moving.
  • the above shooting scenes may be shooting scenes for people shooting, animal shooting, still scene shooting, moving scene shooting, video shooting, movie shooting, TV series shooting and the like.
  • the above scenarios are illustrative only, and should not be construed as limitations on the present application. For example, it can be applied to various scenarios requiring manual zooming operations.
  • Fig. 1 is an application scenario of a control method, a photographing device and a photographing system provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1 when a user uses a camera to take pictures, he first needs to find a view. After determining the scene to be shot, he needs to adjust the image definition of the target object through a zoom operation to obtain a satisfactory image for the user.
  • the user can adjust the image definition of the target object through manual focusing, but this process is highly dependent on the user's proficiency in manual focusing operations, the user's vision level, and the like.
  • users can also obtain a clear image of the target object through automatic focusing.
  • the target object is automatically determined by the camera through an algorithm, and the image of the target object in the focus frame may not be as clear as the image of the non-target object in the focus frame, and it is not easy to adjust.
  • the photographing device in FIG. 1 may be a camera, a video camera, or other devices with a photographing function such as an intelligent terminal.
  • the shooting function refers to the function of shooting still images and/or moving images.
  • the shooting device may be a manually controlled shooting device, or may be an automatic shooting device, and the automatic shooting device may have a manual focus mode and an automatic focus mode.
  • the photographing device can automatically adjust its optical components such as the lens.
  • the auto-focus motor can control the rotation of the lens to adjust the focal length of the lens.
  • the manual focus mode is an important supplement to the auto focus mode. For example, when the ambient lighting is too dark, the auto focus motor cannot precisely control the rotation of the lens, and manual focus is required at this time.
  • the user When the user manually focuses on the camera, the user needs to slowly turn the zoom ring of the camera, and in the process of turning the zoom ring, observe whether the object on the screen is clear through human eyes, when the user observes the image of the object on the screen Stop turning the zoom ring when it is clear enough.
  • the user In the process of manual focusing, the user needs to continuously rotate the zoom ring to find a better focus position, and cannot quickly and accurately find the focus position when the object is in focus.
  • the shooting device may be a handheld shooting device, or a shooting device mounted on a movable platform such as a drone.
  • the user may use a manual assisted focusing method to focus.
  • the focus frame can be displayed on the camera's display screen by half-pressing the shutter button, and the in-focus information of one or more objects in the focus frame can be obtained, and then respond to the user turning the zoom ring Or click a zoom button to trigger automatic zooming, so that the lens of the camera zooms to the in-focus focal length corresponding to the in-focus information of the target object.
  • the gimbal can carry a camera, and there are mechanical buttons on the gimbal to operate the camera.
  • a camera focus mode selection button, a focus adjustment button, etc. may be provided on the pan/tilt.
  • the camera's display interface may display a framing image and a focus frame.
  • the focus frame may include one or more objects, and the camera automatically determines focus information corresponding to the one or more objects.
  • the in-focus information can be displayed on the display interface.
  • a focus distance bar corresponding to the in-focus information is displayed, and the focus distance bar has one or more in-focus focal lengths.
  • the display interface of FIG. 1 may also have a current focus mark (refer to the unfilled triangle in FIG. 1 ), an in-focus indicator (refer to the filled triangle in FIG. 1 ), and the like.
  • inaccurate focus information caused by a change in the distance between the photographed object and the photographing device can also be compensated.
  • the subject and/or the photographing device may move, which will cause the distance between the subject and the photographing device to change, resulting in inaccurate focus information for the subject in the existing focus frame.
  • the focus information corresponding to the shooting object can be compensated, so as to improve the focusing accuracy and the convenience of focusing operation.
  • the user can control the photographing device on the mobile platform or a remote controller communicatively connected with the mobile platform to perform focusing operations.
  • the display interface of the remote controller can be provided with a plurality of virtual buttons for controlling the camera, and the user can realize at least one of the functions of framing, activating the focus frame, triggering autofocus based on in-focus information, or taking images by operating the virtual buttons. .
  • the pan-tilt shown in FIG. 1 may be a handheld pan-tilt or a pan-tilt mounted on a mobile platform, and the pan-tilt carries a photographing device, and the photographing device may have a focus adjustment component.
  • a handheld pan/tilt may include a bracket, a handle, and the like.
  • the bracket may include a matching motor and a shaft arm, and the motor is used to drive the rotation of the shaft arm to drive the movement of the photographing device.
  • the pan/tilt may include but is not limited to a single-axis or multi-axis attitude-adjustable structure for fixing the shooting device on the hand-held part.
  • the gimbal allows the camera to be displaced relative to the hand-held portion, or to rotate along one or more axes.
  • a sensing system may also be included on the pan/tilt.
  • the sensing system may include one or more sensors to sense spatial orientation, velocity, and/or acceleration (eg, rotation and translation with respect to up to three degrees of freedom).
  • the one or more sensors include, but are not limited to, rangefinders, GPS sensors, motion sensors, inertial measurement units, or image sensors.
  • the sensing data provided by the sensing system can be used to control the pose, speed and/or acceleration of the camera, etc.
  • a communication system may also be included on the cloud platform.
  • the communication system can realize the communication between the pan-tilt and the control terminal with the communication system through wired or wireless signals sent and received.
  • a communication system may include any number of transmitters, receivers, and/or transceivers for wireless communication.
  • Communication can be one-way or two-way. Taking two-way communication as an example, data can be transmitted in two directions between the gimbal and the camera.
  • the control data from the pan/tilt can control the operation of the shooting device or other image capture equipment carried by it (capture still or moving images, zoom, turn on or off, switch focus mode, switch imaging mode, change image resolution, change depth of field, changing exposure time, changing viewing angle or field of view).
  • the photographing device is detachably carried on the bearing seat of the pan-tilt, and the pan-tilt is connected to the photographing device in communication.
  • Parts such as a display screen, a lever, and a dial can be arranged on the cloud platform so as to realize human-computer interaction between the user and the cloud platform.
  • a human-computer interaction interface may be displayed on the display screen.
  • the dial includes but is not limited to a focus wheel and/or a zoom wheel.
  • the movable translation can also be connected to the control terminal.
  • Multiple provide control instructions, and receive information (such as the position and/or motion information of the carrier or the shooting device, data sensed by the shooting device, such as image data) from one or more of the pan/tilt and the shooting device.
  • the control data of the control terminal may include instructions about position, movement, and braking, or control over the pan/tilt and/or the shooting device. For example, control data may result in changes in the position and/or orientation of the gimbal.
  • the control data of the control terminal can control the operation of the shooting device or other image capture equipment (capture still or moving images, zoom, turn on or off, switch focus mode, switch imaging mode, change image resolution, change focal length, change depth of field, change exposure time, changing viewing angle or field of view).
  • communications to the gimbal and/or camera may include information from one or more sensors.
  • Communication information may include sensory information transmitted from one or more different types of sensors, such as GPS sensors, motion sensors, inertial sensors, proximity sensors, or image sensors.
  • the control terminal may be a remote controller of a mobile platform, or an intelligent electronic device such as a mobile phone, an iPad, or a wearable electronic device that can be used to control the pan/tilt.
  • the control terminal can be far away from the pan-tilt to realize the remote control of the pan-tilt, and can be fixed or detachably installed on the pan-tilt, which can be set according to specific requirements.
  • the mobile platform can communicate with remote devices other than the controlling terminal, or with remote devices other than the controlling terminal.
  • the control terminal can also communicate with another remote device and PTZ.
  • the pan/tilt and/or the control terminal may communicate with another mobile platform or a carrier or a photographing device of another mobile platform.
  • the additional remote device may be a second terminal or other computing device (such as a computer, desktop computer, tablet computer, smart phone, or other mobile device) when desired.
  • the remote device can transmit data to the pan-tilt, receive data from the pan-tilt, transmit data to the control terminal, and/or receive data from the control terminal.
  • the remote device can be connected to the Internet or other telecommunication networks, so that the data received from the pan/tilt and/or the control terminal can be uploaded to a website or server.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a photographing device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the imaging device 100 has an imaging unit 102 and a lens unit 200 .
  • the imaging unit 102 includes an image sensor 120 , an imaging control unit 110 , and a memory 130 .
  • the image sensor 120 may include at least one of CCD or CMOS.
  • the image sensor 120 outputs the image data of the optical image formed through the plurality of lenses 210 to the imaging control unit 110 .
  • the imaging control unit 110 may be constituted by a microprocessor such as a CPU or an MPU, a microcontroller such as an MCU, or the like.
  • the imaging control unit 110 can control the imaging device 100 according to a user operation from a user, and the user operation can be an operation on the lens unit 200 , the display screen of the imaging unit 102 , or a remote controller.
  • the memory 130 may be a computer-readable recording medium, and may include at least one of flash memories such as SRAM, DRAM, EPROM, EEPROM, and USB memory.
  • the memory 130 stores programs and the like necessary for the imaging control unit 110 to control the image sensor 120 and the like.
  • the memory 130 may be disposed inside the housing of the photographing device 100 .
  • the memory 130 may be configured to be detachable from the casing of the photographing device 100 .
  • the lens unit 200 may include a plurality of lenses 210 , a lens moving mechanism 212 , and a lens control unit 220 .
  • the plurality of lenses 210 may include at least one of a zoom lens, a variable focal length lens, or a follow focus lens. At least part of the plurality of lenses 210 is configured to be movable along the optical axis.
  • the lens unit 200 may be an interchangeable lens that can be attached or detached from the imaging unit 102 .
  • the lens moving mechanism 212 moves at least part of the plurality of lenses 210 along the optical axis.
  • the lens control unit 220 drives the lens moving mechanism 212 according to the lens control command from the imaging unit 102 to move one or more lenses 210 along the optical axis direction.
  • the lens control command includes but not limited to: at least one of a zoom control command or a focus control command.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of adjusting the focal length by changing the distance between lenses provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the zoom lens can be composed of multiple groups of lens groups (such as L1, L2 and L3).
  • the output torque of the motor can be used to rotate the zoom ring or the focus ring to drive the movement of the lens groups, and the lens groups are relatively A change in position will change the overall equivalent focal length of the lens.
  • the moving lens group may be different, and the relationship between the moving distance of the lens group and the focal length change may be different. In this case, only the mapping relationship needs to be changed, and this embodiment is also applicable.
  • the focal length f is changed by moving the concave lens L2 in the middle, and the focal length f and the position x of the lens L2 can be considered as a linear relationship, as shown in formula (1).
  • k1 and b1 are undetermined constants related to mechanical structure and lens group parameters.
  • the motor drives the zoom ring to rotate or the follow focus ring to rotate through gear meshing.
  • the above undetermined constants may be obtained through calibration and/or calculation.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a lens provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the lens can also include an aperture ring for adjusting the aperture.
  • the photographing device 100 may perform at least one of autofocus, manual focus, or manual assisted focus according to a mode selected by the user, and obtain a clear image of the target object.
  • the camera control unit inside the camera calculates the collected image information, and displays the points with relatively large contrast between adjacent pixels in the viewfinder in a special color to remind the user of the current focus range.
  • This method can be called peaking focus.
  • the viewfinder screen is enlarged to a specified ratio (such as 1:1) between the display screen and the screen pixels, so that the user can observe whether the focus is clear.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • control method may include operation S502 to operation S506.
  • a set of in-focus information for at least one object in an in-focus frame (ROI) of a current image is acquired.
  • the current image may be the image displayed on the display screen of the camera when the user uses the photographing device to view a view.
  • the focus frame is displayed on the display screen of the camera (or the focus frame is displayed on the display screen when the user presses the shutter button halfway), and the focus frame can be automatically obtained for one or more objects included in the focus frame.
  • focus information The field of view corresponding to the focus frame is small and includes a limited number of objects, which will not result in too much focus information, thereby reducing the difficulty for the user to determine the focus information corresponding to the target object from the excessive focus information.
  • the display position and size of the focus frame on the display screen can be specified by the user, or the display position and size of the focus frame on the display screen can be preset, such as being located in the middle of the display screen.
  • the position of the focus frame on the monitor can change as the subject moves.
  • the in-focus information may include the distance information between the camera and the object in the focus frame collected by the sensor, or determine the distance between the objects corresponding to the adjacent pixels based on the contrast intensity between adjacent image pixels collected at different focal lengths information.
  • the distance information may be an object distance, and for each lens, the object distance has a corresponding focal length.
  • the set of focus information includes parameters and focus strength associated with the lens.
  • the in-focus intensity can be stored or displayed by means of an in-focus intensity curve or the like.
  • the parameters associated with the lens include a focal length and a focus distance of the lens, wherein the focus distance is the distance between the subject and the lens.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the focal length and focusing distance of the lens provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the light irradiated to the subject is reflected to the lens, and the light reaches the sensor of the camera after refraction and so on.
  • a sensor and a lens with a specific size have a corresponding shooting range at a specific focal length f.
  • the focusing distance may also be referred to as object distance d, which is the distance between the subject and the lens.
  • the in-focus intensity curve can be obtained in at least two ways, the contrast mode or the phase mode, and the in-focus intensity curve is all focusable object focal distances within the focus frame (ROI).
  • the contrast intensity of the object image in the focus frame is calculated at the current focal length, and the contrast intensity value corresponding to the passed focal length is obtained with the rotation of the zoom ring, and the contrast intensity curve is obtained as a composite focal strength curve.
  • phase mode in the auxiliary focus mode, through the phase focus information integrated by the camera sensor (sensor) such as a distance sensor, all focusable focal lengths in the ROI are obtained in advance, and the focus intensity curve is obtained.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a focus frame, an object, and focus information provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • a focus frame is displayed at the central position of the display image displayed on the monitor.
  • An image of 4 objects is displayed in the focus frame, and the object located in the middle of the 4 objects is the target object.
  • the distance between each object and the camera can be the same or different. When the distance between each object and the camera is different, each object has a corresponding different in-focus focal length: in-focus focal length 1 to in-focus focal length 4 .
  • the camera may automatically determine the focus information of each object in the focus frame, such as focus focal length 1 to focus focal length 4 .
  • the in-focus focal length information can be displayed on the display screen.
  • a sign of the current focal length can also be displayed on the display screen. The user can conveniently select the focal length of the focal point to automatically zoom the focal length of the lens to the focal length of the focal point 3.
  • multiple objects may be included in the focus frame of the current image.
  • the target object is only one of the multiple objects, and the camera control unit may calculate the focus of each object in the multiple objects when they are in focus. focal length.
  • the in-focus focal length of each object can be different or partly the same when in focus, that is to say, each object can correspond to a different in-focus focal length, or some objects in the plurality of objects correspond to the same In-focus focal length.
  • the shooting device includes a display screen for displaying at least one focus information in the focus information set, and the focus information includes a focus intensity peak value.
  • the display component can display the in-focus focal length indicator, which is used to indicate the in-focus focal length, which is only a schematic illustration here, and does not limit the in-focus The specific shape of the focal length indicator. It should be noted that the focus focal length may not be displayed on the display screen.
  • the display component can display multiple in-focus focal length indicator marks, and the multiple in-focus focal length indicator marks are used to indicate the in-focus focal lengths corresponding to the multiple objects.
  • the display component can also display a current focal length mark, which is used to indicate the current focal length. It should be noted that the current focal length may not be displayed on the display screen.
  • the control display screen displays a plurality of in-focus focal length indicator marks, and the multiple in-focus focal length indicator marks can specifically be In-focus focal length indicator 71, in-focus focal length indicator 72, in-focus focal length indicator 73, in-focus focal length indicator 74 as shown in Figure 7; in-focus focal length indicator 71, in-focus focal length indicator 72, in-focus focus
  • the in-focus indicator mark 73 or the in-focus indicator mark 74 is used to indicate the in-focus focal length of at least one object among the plurality of objects when in focus.
  • the camera control unit can also control the display screen to display a current focal length mark 70 , and the current focal length mark 70 is used to indicate the current focus value corresponding to the current adjustment position of the focus adjustment assembly 21 .
  • the focal length difference indicated between the current focal length mark 70 and a certain in-focus focal length indicator mark, such as the in-focus focal length indicator mark 71 is related to the difference between the current focus value and the in-focus focal length indicated by the in-focus focal length indicator mark 71 .
  • the adjustment position of the zoom ring is at position A, the current focal length is smaller than the focal length corresponding to the target object (in-focus focal length 3), the current focal length mark 70 is located on the left side of the in-focus focal length indicator mark 73, and the current The larger the indicated focal distance difference between the focal length mark 70 and the in-focus focal length indicator mark 73 is, the greater the difference between the current focus value and the in-focus focal length indicated by the in-focus focal length indicator mark 73 is.
  • the above method may further include the following operation: updating the focus information of the focus frame by a sensor.
  • the sensor can update the distance between the two in real time, and then update the focus information set. This helps to improve the problem of inaccurate focus information caused by changes in the positional relationship between the object and the photographing device.
  • a first operation is obtained, wherein the first operation includes a zoom operation or the first operation is for in-focus information in the in-focus information set.
  • the zooming process may be triggered by a first operation.
  • the lens of the camera has a zoom ring, and when the user turns the zoom ring, the zooming process can be triggered.
  • the camera has buttons for zooming, such as a button for increasing the focal length and a button for reducing the focal length.
  • the zooming process can be triggered.
  • a zooming component is displayed on the display screen of the camera, and the zooming process can be triggered when the user operates the focusing component.
  • a focus intensity curve is displayed on the display screen of the camera, and when the user selects a certain focus focal length from the focus intensity curve, the zooming process can be triggered.
  • the gimbal carrying the camera has buttons for zooming, such as a button to increase the focal length and a button to decrease the focal length.
  • buttons for zooming such as a button to increase the focal length and a button to decrease the focal length.
  • the zooming process can be triggered .
  • a focusing component is displayed on the display screen of the pan/tilt, and the zooming process can be triggered when the user operates the focusing component.
  • a focus intensity curve is displayed on the display screen of the gimbal, and when the user selects a certain focus focal length from the focus intensity curve, the zooming process can be triggered.
  • the remote control has buttons for zooming, such as a button for increasing the focal length and a button for reducing the focal length.
  • buttons for zooming such as a button for increasing the focal length and a button for reducing the focal length.
  • the user presses one of the buttons it can trigger the The zoom process of the camera on the mobile platform.
  • a focusing component is displayed on the display screen of the remote controller, and the zooming process can be triggered when the user operates the focusing component.
  • a focus intensity curve is displayed on the display screen of the remote controller, and when the user selects a certain focus focal length from the focus intensity curve, the zooming process can be triggered.
  • the user may input the first user operation through a lever or a dial or the like.
  • the obtaining of the first operation is that the user rotates the zoom ring or clicks a button for zooming by the user, or the like. For example, if at least one piece of focus information is included in the focus information set, an automatic zoom operation is obtained in response to the rotation of the zoom ring.
  • obtaining the first operation includes at least one of the following. For example, if the set of focus information includes at least one piece of focus information, in response to the rotation speed of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset rotation speed threshold, an automatic zoom operation is obtained.
  • the set of focus information includes at least one piece of focus information, in response to the duration of rotation of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset duration threshold, an automatic zoom operation is obtained.
  • the focus information set includes at least one focus information, in response to the rotation speed of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset rotation speed threshold, and the duration of rotation of the zoom ring is greater than or equal to a preset duration threshold, an automatic zoom operation is obtained .
  • the preset rotation speed threshold and the preset duration threshold can be calibrated according to experience or through experiments.
  • the lens of the photographing device is controlled to automatically focus based on the focus information set.
  • automatic focusing can be performed based on the determined focus information, without the need for the user to manually adjust the zoom ring to perform manual zooming, which not only helps to increase the zooming speed, but also helps to improve the zooming accuracy and reduce the Eliminates the dependence of manual zoom on the user's operating experience and vision level.
  • the focal lengths corresponding to each object may be different, and the user can adjust the focal length of the camera to the target focal length by gradually zooming.
  • the target focal length is sequentially approached based on each focus information in the focus information set.
  • the target focal length is approached in segments based on each focus information in the focus information set and the focal length change amount input by the user.
  • the user can directly select the focus information to increase the zooming speed.
  • the user can realize one-step zooming by directly selecting the focal length of the focus.
  • the lens may include a zoom ring. Accordingly, the first operation includes turning the zoom ring in a specific direction.
  • controlling the lens of the camera to automatically focus based on the focus information set may include the following operations: repeating the following operations until the focal length of the lens is changed to a focal length corresponding to the target object: in response to the first operation, controlling The focal length of the lens is changed to the target focal length in the focus information set.
  • the target focal length is the focal length that is determined based on the current focal length of the lens and matched in the focus information set based on the rotation direction information of the zoom ring.
  • the target focal length may include any one of the following: the focal length in the focus information set with the smallest difference with the current focal length of the lens, and the focal length in the focus information set with the largest difference with the current focal length of the lens.
  • the focal length is first adjusted to the closest or farthest focal length, and then the zooming process is repeated to achieve the target focal point step by step.
  • peaks foreground and foreground
  • the user can quickly select and focus among different peaks through manual assisted focusing.
  • manual assisted focusing is similar to the sticky effect: for example, when moving an object to another object, if certain conditions are met, another object will automatically attract the object to the past, without the need for the user to keep the object Move to this other object to improve the convenience of operation.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a manual assisted focusing process based on a zoom ring provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • in-focus focal length 1 to in-focus focal length 4 there are four in-focus focal lengths for objects in the focus frame: in-focus focal length 1 to in-focus focal length 4 .
  • the current focal length is between in-focus focal length 1 and in-focus focal length 2, that is, the camera is not in focus at the current focal length.
  • the user increases the focal length of the camera by turning the zoom ring, and the camera can automatically zoom with the current focal length as the starting point and the focus focal length 2 as the target focal length. During this period, the user does not need to adjust the focal length of the camera to the focal length 2 through precise zooming operations.
  • the zooming process is performed automatically, and its speed is faster than manual zooming to the focal length 2. After zooming to focal length 2, the camera stops zooming and displays the image captured at focal length 2 on the monitor.
  • the automatic zooming process triggered by the first operation is completed once above.
  • the user checks the image on the display screen, if the image of the target object is not clear enough, it indicates that the in-focus focal length 2 is not the in-focus focal length corresponding to the target object.
  • the user can increase the focal length of the camera by turning the zoom ring, and the camera can automatically zoom with the focal length 2 as the starting point and the focal length 3 as the target focal length. During this period, the user does not need to adjust the focal length of the camera to the focal length 3 through precise zooming operations.
  • the zooming process is performed automatically, and its speed is faster than manual zooming to the focal length 3.
  • the camera stops zooming and displays the image captured at focal length 3 on the monitor.
  • the automatic zoom process triggered by the first operation twice is completed above. After the user checks the image captured at the in-focus focal length 3 on the display screen, if the image of the target object is clear, the user can perform the shooting operation.
  • a focus prompt may be given to the user.
  • focusing prompts for example, focusing prompts in visual form, auditory form, mechanical form, and the like.
  • the focus prompt may be visually displayed on the display component.
  • the prompt information can be displayed on the viewfinder or screen of the shooting device, or the screen of the remote controller.
  • the focus prompt is displayed on the screen, the image captured by the shooting device and the focus prompt can be displayed on the screen simultaneously, and the focus prompt can be covered or superimposed on the image displayed on the screen.
  • the user operates the zoom ring to change the focal length of the shooting device, the user can simultaneously see the image and focus prompts to determine whether the image is in focus.
  • the display component displays include an in-focus focal length mark, a current focus distance mark, a current focus distance mark (in-focus) and the like.
  • the display component display may also include a target focal length mark and the like.
  • the current focus mark and the current focus mark (focus) can be represented in different shapes, for example, the current focus mark is represented by a triangle, and the current focus mark (focus) is different from the current focus by a five-pointed star, circle, dot, etc.
  • the flags of the flags are indicated.
  • the current focal length mark and the current focal length mark (in-focus) can also be represented by the same shape and different states (such as filling state, color, size, etc.). For example, the size of the current focus mark (in focus) is larger than the current focus mark, the current focus mark (in focus) has a fill, the current focus mark (in focus) is yellow and the current focus mark (in focus) is green, etc.
  • obtaining the rotation amount of the zoom ring may further include the following operations. First, the auxiliary focal length is determined based on the current focal length of the lens and the rotation amount of the zoom ring. Then, based on the auxiliary focal length, the target focal length is determined from the focus information set, wherein the target focal length is based on the auxiliary focal length as the initial focal length, and is matched in the focus information set according to the rotation direction information of the zoom ring, and the determined and initial focal length The closest focal length.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a process of manually assisting focusing based on a zoom ring according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • in-focus focal length 1 to in-focus focal length 4 there are four in-focus focal lengths for objects in the focus frame: in-focus focal length 1 to in-focus focal length 4 .
  • the current focal length is between in-focus focal length 1 and in-focus focal length 2, that is, the camera is not in focus at the current focal length.
  • the user increases the focal length of the camera by turning the zoom ring.
  • the difference from the embodiment in FIG. 8 is that in this embodiment, the amount of rotation generated by the user's rotation of the zoom ring is also acquired.
  • the user can see the blurring degree of the image of the target object in the preview graphics, if the blurring degree is higher. In order to make the image of the target object clear, the larger the focal length needs to be adjusted.
  • the user can determine a rough zoom range according to the image blur of the target object. If the image of the target object is adjusted from the current focal length to be clear, the zoom ring needs to be rotated at least 1/4 circle or 3/1 circle or more. In order to avoid too many in-focus focal lengths (such as in-focus focal length 2) between the current focal length and the target focal length, resulting in the need for the user to perform the first operation multiple times when using the zoom process shown in Figure 8, the camera can use the current focal length as the starting point , determine an auxiliary focal length based on the amount of rotation of the zoom ring (refer to the dotted triangle mark in the middle state of Fig. ), and zoom automatically.
  • in-focus focal length 2 such as in-focus focal length 2
  • the user does not need to adjust the focal length of the camera to focus on focal length 2 and focus on focal length 3 through precise zoom operations.
  • the zoom process is automatically performed, and its speed is faster than manual zooming to focus on focal length 2 and focus on focal length 3.
  • one autofocus step is reduced, and the zoom speed is further improved.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 may also have focus prompt information, and reference may be made to the content related to the above focus prompt information.
  • the indicated focal length difference between the in-focus focal length indicator mark and the current focal length mark changes uniformly as the adjustment position of the zoom ring changes.
  • the rotation angle of the zoom ring can also be referred to as the adjustment amount of the zoom ring, and the indicated focal length difference between the in-focus focal length indicator mark and the current focal length mark changes uniformly with the adjustment amount of the zoom ring.
  • the zoom ring surrounds the optical assembly, and the adjustment amount of the zoom ring may specifically be the rotation angle of the zoom ring, and the rotation angle of the zoom ring refers to the change amount of the angle of the zoom ring when it is rotated.
  • the indicated focal length difference between the in-focus focal length indicator mark and the current focal length mark changes accordingly.
  • the variation of the indicated focal length difference is directly proportional to the rotation angle of the zoom ring, that is, the indicated focal length difference between the in-focus focal length indicator mark and the current focal length indicator changes uniformly with the rotation angle of the zoom ring.
  • the peak value of the in-focus intensity can be displayed in numerical values, graphs, or line segments.
  • the display screen is also used to display input components corresponding to the in-focus information set.
  • the input component can perform information input in response to user operations, such as inputting focus information selected by the user through the input component.
  • controlling the lens of the photographing device to automatically focus based on the focus information set may include: in response to a user operation on the input component, determining the focal length of the target object corresponding to the target object from the focus information set.
  • the above method may further include at least one of the following operations.
  • a current focus indicator is displayed, which corresponds to a point in the in-focus intensity curve.
  • in-focus prompt information is displayed, and the in-focus prompt information includes display state change information of the current focus distance mark.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a process of manually assisting focusing based on focus information provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 it is a framing image displayed on the display screen of the camera.
  • the display screen When the user performs manual assisted focusing to focus, the display screen also displays a focus frame (the frame shown by the dotted line).
  • the image within the focus frame includes head image (target object) and leaf image (non-target object). Since the distance between each object in the focusing frame and the shooting device is different, the focal length of each object is also different.
  • in-focus information, in-focus prompt information, and the like may also be displayed on the display screen.
  • the left side of the focus frame also displays the in-focus focal length in a bar, wherein each scale in the bar can represent a in-focus focal length.
  • a focal length mark may also be displayed at a position corresponding to the in-focus focal length of the bar, as shown by an unfilled triangle in FIG. 10 .
  • the user can click on a scale in the bar-shaped in-focus focal length. If the image of the target object collected at the focal length corresponding to the scale is not clear enough, the user can click on another scale to zoom to obtain the zoomed image of the target object, and repeat the above operations until the image of the target object is clear.
  • the bar-shaped in-focus focal lengths shown in FIG. 10 are only exemplary, and may also be displayed as arrow lines with scales, line segments with scales, circles with scales, and the like.
  • FIG. 10 also shows focus prompt information, such as a filled triangle in FIG. 10 , which helps to improve the user's current focus state. For example, when the current focal length is equal to the in-focus focal length in the in-focus information, in-focus prompt information is displayed.
  • the in-focus prompt information may be prompted by a state change of the current focus distance mark, such as filling, changing color or changing size of the current focus distance mark.
  • any in-focus focal length indicator mark among the plurality of in-focus focal length indicator marks is acquired.
  • the user clicks on the in-focus focal length indicator mark on the display screen the display screen may be a touch screen, and the touch screen can sense the user's click operation on the in-focus focal length indicator mark, and send the click operation to to Camera Control.
  • the display screen is also used to display an in-focus intensity curve corresponding to the in-focus information set.
  • the in-focus strength can represent the image pixel contrast value of the object in the focus frame, and the larger the contrast value, the higher the in-focus strength.
  • the in-focus strength can also represent the probability of an object existing at a certain focal length.
  • the in-focus intensity curve can be generated as follows. First, determine the in-focus information to be displayed.
  • the in-focus information to be displayed is the focal length information in the in-focus information set that meets the display conditions.
  • the display conditions include that the in-focus intensity corresponding to the in-focus information to be displayed is greater than or equal to a preset intensity threshold. Then, an in-focus intensity curve is generated based on the in-focus information to be displayed.
  • the in-focus information is displayed in the form of an in-focus intensity curve
  • the two-dimensional coordinate system where the in-focus intensity curve is located includes a first coordinate axis representing focal length and a second coordinate axis representing in-focus intensity.
  • the first coordinate axis and the second coordinate axis may be perpendicular to each other.
  • the first coordinate axis may be the X axis based on the long side of the display screen
  • the second coordinate axis may be the Y axis based on the wide side of the display screen.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an in-focus intensity curve provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • a two-dimensional coordinate system is displayed, wherein the horizontal axis represents the focal length, and the vertical axis represents the in-focus intensity.
  • the abscissa is the focus distance (this distance is obtained through focal length conversion), and the ordinate is the focus intensity; there is also a current focus indicator Indicates the current focusing distance (with a simple scale as a reminder).
  • the abscissa of the view is adaptively zoomed to only display the obtained contrast intensity range to highlight the contrast intensity content .
  • phase mode the intensity curve in the focus frame is directly drawn on the OSD, and all focusable points are marked as peak values.
  • the in-focus intensity curve may be processed such as scaling, stretching, cropping, and deformation.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the processed in-focus intensity curve provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the in-focus information of these objects can be filtered.
  • the first peak and the third peak on the right side in Figure 11 have been filtered in the upper image of Figure 12 because of the low in-focus intensity (such as lower than the dotted horizontal line in Figure 11) Lose.
  • the in-focus intensity curve may be clipped in order to prevent the in-focus intensity curve from occupying too much space.
  • FIG. 11 and Fig. 12 there is no in-focus intensity between the two peaks on the left in Fig. 11, which has been filtered out in the upper image of Fig. 12 .
  • the in-focus intensity curve can be abstracted into a scale. Referring to the upper figure of Figure 12, there are three peaks with high in-focus intensity, and these three peaks can be projected onto the scale, as shown in the lower figure of Figure 12.
  • a relatively regular in-focus intensity curve can be displayed on the display screen, the display space occupied by the in-focus intensity curve can be reduced, and the tidiness of the displayed image can be improved.
  • the first operation includes a sub-region selection operation.
  • controlling the lens of the photographing device to automatically focus based on the focus information set may include the following operations. Firstly, the target focal length corresponding to the selected sub-region is determined from the in-focus information set based on the first correspondence. Then, in response to the target focal length, the lens of the photographing device is controlled to automatically focus based on the target focal length.
  • the first corresponding relationship may be fixed.
  • the first correspondence may be variable.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a process of manually assisting focusing based on focus information provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • the collected images and focus frames are displayed on the display screen.
  • the camera only acquires the in-focus information included in the focus frame, but the user cannot intuitively determine the correspondence between each in-focus information and each object.
  • there are objects A and B in the focus frame and it is determined by pixel contrast that there are in-focus information A and in-focus information B, and the in-focus information A and in-focus information B can be displayed on the display screen for the user to select.
  • the user needs to determine the correspondence between the object A and the object B and the in-focus information A and the in-focus information B based on experience or logical reasoning.
  • the user may sequentially select focus information A and focus information B to determine focus information corresponding to the target object. The efficiency of manual focus needs to be further improved.
  • the imaging device of this embodiment further provides a first correspondence so as to select the in-focus information corresponding to the target object.
  • the above method may further include the following operation: displaying the in-focus intensity corresponding to at least part of the sub-regions in the focus frame.
  • obtaining the first operation may include the following operations. Firstly, in response to a selection operation on a sub-region in the focus frame, the selected sub-region is determined. Then, the target focal length corresponding to the selected sub-region is determined from the in-focus information set based on the first correspondence.
  • the first correspondence is variable as an example for illustration.
  • the camera can divide the display area corresponding to each object from the focus frame by means of image processing, and determine the in-focus information corresponding to each display area. In this way, the corresponding relationship between each display area and the in-focus information can be established.
  • the selection of in-focus information can be realized by clicking the image of the head. For example, image processing is first performed to determine that there are two object images in the focus frame, and then focus information corresponding to each object image is determined through a contrast mode, and the determined focus information is bound to the corresponding object image.
  • the camera can determine corresponding in-focus information based on the head image, and then automatically focus based on the in-focus information.
  • the first correspondence is fixed as an example for illustration.
  • the focus frame can be divided into multiple sub-regions in advance, and the position of each sub-region relative to the focus frame is fixed.
  • each sub-region can be established.
  • the sub-area may be clicked to select in-focus information corresponding to the target object. For example, when the user clicks on the sub-area where the head image is located, the camera may determine corresponding focus information based on the head image, and then perform automatic focusing based on the focus information.
  • the area of the focus frame may be small.
  • an area can be provided on the display interface for zooming in on the image in the focus frame. Ease and accuracy of selecting sub-regions.
  • the sticky focus mode may be entered at any time when there is at least one in-focus intensity peak. For example, once the focus frame rotates to a certain extent (or speed) in the direction of the peak value, it will automatically and quickly focus to the nearest focus intensity peak in this direction, and the current focus indicator will change color (for example, from red to green) to show focus.
  • the operation of acquiring focus information sets for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may be performed only when conditions are met.
  • acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may include the following operations.
  • a set of focus information for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is acquired.
  • the form of the second operation may be the same as the first operation, such as pressing a button corresponding to the function of entering the manual auxiliary focus mode, clicking a virtual button corresponding to the function of entering the manual auxiliary focus mode on the display interface, and the like.
  • one button can be used to realize one or more functions, for example, the shutter button can activate different functions in different states, and it can switch to the manual auxiliary focus function and activate the focus frame function in the half-press state. Fully press down the corresponding shooting function.
  • a set of focus information for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is acquired.
  • an operation of acquiring a focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may be performed.
  • the in-focus information obtained a long time before the manual focus operation may be caused by the shaking or moving of the user during the operation, or the shaking or moving of the target object, resulting in the in-focus information changes happened.
  • the focus information is obtained after the user starts to perform the zoom operation, which effectively reduces the time interval between performing the zoom operation and obtaining the focus information, and helps to improve the accuracy of the obtained focus information .
  • acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may include the following operations. For example, in response to the second operation, the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is acquired based on the sensor.
  • the senor can be used to measure the distance between the object and the camera (or lens group).
  • the sensor can be set on the shooting device, such as a built-in sensor of the camera or an external sensor.
  • the sensor can be arranged on a bracket carrying the shooting device, such as on a mounting plate on which the shooting device is installed, on a bracket of a pan-tilt, or on a handle assembly of a pan-tilt.
  • the sensor can be set on a mobile platform equipped with a camera, such as a drone or a land robot.
  • the specific setting position of the sensor is not limited.
  • the sensors include but are not limited to at least one of the following: direct measurement sensors such as laser range finders and infrared range finders, and accumulative measurement sensors such as inertial measurement units (IMUs), speedometers, and acceleration sensors.
  • the sensor can be arranged on the photographing device, the pan/tilt equipped with the photographing device, or the mobile platform equipped with the photographing device, so as to determine the attitude information of the main body of the inertial measurement unit.
  • the inertial measurement unit may be arranged on the fixing mechanism of the photographing device for measuring the attitude information of the fixing mechanism.
  • the inertial measurement unit may be at least one of an accelerometer or a gyroscope, and may be used to measure the attitude and acceleration of the photographing device.
  • the photographing device held by the user is taken as an example for illustration.
  • the monocular (single lens) shooting device is equipped with sensors such as structured light and depth of field detection (also known as time-of-flight, Time of flight, TOF for short), etc., which can realize distance measurement.
  • the binocular photographing device or the multi-purpose photographing device can calculate the distance based on the images captured for the same object under the respective perspectives of the binoculars.
  • Sensors such as IMU can be used to assist in determining the distance. For example, in a scene where the distance between the target object and the shooting device is known, the displacement and direction of the shooting device itself can be detected based on the IMU, so that the target object can be updated based on the distance and displacement. distance from the camera.
  • IMU is a device that measures the three-axis attitude angle (or angular rate) and acceleration of an object.
  • a three-axis gyroscope and a three-axis accelerometer can be installed in the IMU, and the pose of the object can be calculated by measuring the angular velocity and acceleration of the object in three-dimensional space.
  • the inertial measurement unit may include a gyroscope and/or an accelerometer
  • the gyroscope may be used to determine the angular acceleration information of the gimbal
  • the accelerometer may be used to determine the acceleration information of the gimbal. Since the shooting device and the gimbal can be fixed to each other, the angular acceleration information and acceleration information of the gimbal can be used to characterize the attitude information and acceleration information of the shooting device.
  • phase focus information integrated by the camera sensor For example, in the phase mode, through the phase focus information integrated by the camera sensor, all focusable focal lengths in the ROI are obtained in advance, and the focus intensity curve is obtained.
  • the reinitialization distance condition includes at least one of the following: the inertial measurement unit has experienced a power-off operation, the camera or the gimbal has experienced a power-off operation, the displacement of the camera or gimbal in the power-off state exceeds the recalibration displacement threshold, or the inertial measurement The acceleration of the unit is greater than the set acceleration threshold.
  • acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may include the following operations. For example, in response to the second operation, by adjusting the focal length of the lens, based on the pixel contrast of the at least one object in the focus frame of the current image, the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is acquired.
  • the distance between the target object and the camera and the corresponding in-focus focal length may be determined by determining the distance based on the amount of blur of multiple images captured when the positional relationship between the lens and the imaging surface is different.
  • this method is referred to as a Bokeh Detection Auto Focus (BDAF for short) method.
  • the amount of blur (Cost) of an image can be represented by the following equation (2) using a Gaussian function.
  • x represents a pixel position in the horizontal direction.
  • represents the standard deviation value.
  • acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image based on the sensor may include the following operations.
  • the in-focus focal length of at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is acquired by the sensor according to a preset sampling period, wherein the image captured based on the in-focus focal length satisfies the preset imaging condition.
  • At least part of the in-focus focal length and the in-focus intensity information corresponding to at least part of the in-focus focal length are used as in-focus information.
  • acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image based on the pixel contrast of the at least one object in the focus frame of the current image by adjusting the focal length of the lens may include the following operations.
  • the first preset focal length may be any one of the current focal length, the minimum focal length of the lens, or the maximum focal length of the lens.
  • the second preset focal length may be any one of a focal length having a designated focal length difference relative to the current focal length, a maximum focal length of the lens, or a minimum focal length of the lens.
  • the in-focus shooting surface is determined from the plurality of shooting surfaces, and there are pixels whose adjacent pixel contrast exceeds a preset contrast threshold in the image information of the in-focus shooting surface.
  • At least part of the in-focus focal length corresponding to the in-focus shooting surface and the corresponding in-focus intensity are used as in-focus information.
  • the lens and the imaging plane are in the first positional relationship (for example, the first focal length)
  • the first image is captured and stored in the memory.
  • the lens and the imaging surface are in a state of a second positional relationship (such as a second focal length).
  • a second image is taken at this second focal length and stored in memory. This determines the amount of image blur for the same object in the first image and the second image. Repeating the above process for several times can obtain: multiple image blurring amounts for the same object at different focal lengths, and the multiple image blurring amounts can form an image blurring amount curve.
  • the focal length corresponding to the minimum point of the image blur amount curve is taken as the target focal length.
  • the object distance between the target object and the lens can also be obtained based on the target focal length.
  • the focus lens or image sensor can be moved in the direction of the optical axis without exceeding the focus point.
  • the amount of movement of the focus lens or the image sensor can be, for example, 5 ⁇ m, 10 ⁇ m, 15 ⁇ m, or the like.
  • adjusting the focal length of the lens from the first preset focal length to the second preset focal length includes: adjusting the focal length of the lens from the minimum focal length of the lens to the maximum focal length of the lens.
  • a plane of focus can correspond to a sharp image of one or more objects.
  • the in-focus information of the object included in the focus frame may be acquired after the zoom operation is detected.
  • the lens includes a zoom ring.
  • acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may include the following operations.
  • a third operation is acquired, which causes the zoom ring to rotate.
  • the operation manner of the third operation may be the same as that of the first operation, which is not limited here.
  • the in-focus shooting surface is determined from the plurality of shooting surfaces, and there are pixels whose adjacent pixel contrast exceeds a preset contrast threshold in the image information of the in-focus shooting surface.
  • obtaining the second operation may include at least one of the following: receiving an operation on a preset key, receiving an operation on a preset interactive component, or receiving a preset operation gesture.
  • the preset button can be set on: the photographing device, the pan/tilt carrying the photographing device (such as the handle assembly of the pan/tilt), and the control terminal (such as a remote controller, etc.) of the mobile platform carrying the photographing device.
  • the preset interactive component can be displayed on the display screen of the shooting device, the display screen of the pan/tilt carrying the shooting device, or the display screen of the control terminal of the mobile platform carrying the shooting device.
  • the operation gestures can be collected by an image processor or a remote controller.
  • obtaining the second operation includes: generating the second operation when the preset key is pressed with a first specified displacement, wherein the preset button has at least two specified displacements, and the first specified displacement is at least two specified displacements.
  • the preset button may be a shutter button or the like.
  • the above method may further include the following operations.
  • the fourth operation is a second designated displacement when the preset key is pressed, wherein the first designated displacement and the second designated displacement are respectively one of at least two designated displacements. Then, in response to the fourth operation, image information is acquired.
  • the user in the manual focus mode, once the user presses the shutter button halfway, the user enters the manual assisted focus mode.
  • the focus object in the focus frame is locked by IMU and visual means. Even if the lens and/or body shakes, or the lens and/or body moves, the focus frame is still locked to the focus object, which can support Focus first and then compose the picture.
  • the following takes the second operation and the fourth operation obtained through the shutter button of the camera as an example for illustrative description.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of preset button states and corresponding displayed images on the display screen provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the state of the shutter button is shown on the left, and the display image corresponding to the state of the shutter button is shown on the right side of the display.
  • the upper figure of FIG. 14 shows a framing image.
  • the button is half-pressed, the second operation is obtained, and a focus frame is displayed in the framing image.
  • the image is collected and saved, and the captured image can be displayed on the display screen.
  • options: save and delete buttons may be shown on the display screen for selection by the user.
  • the manual assisted focus mode in order to improve the accuracy of the focus information to ensure the clarity of the target object in the captured image, the manual assisted focus mode may be exited after the conditions for exiting the manual assisted focus mode are met. Wherein, when the manual assisted focusing mode condition is met, the existing in-focus information may result in a lower definition of the captured image of the target object.
  • Fig. 15 is a schematic flowchart of a control method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • the above method may further include operation S1508 after performing operation S306 to obtain the second operation.
  • the conditions for exiting the manual assisted focusing mode include at least one of the following.
  • the preset button is in a state corresponding to exiting the manual assisted focusing mode.
  • the mode can be exited.
  • the target object moves out of the focus frame, wherein there are multiple objects in the focus frame, and there is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the focus information in the focus information set.
  • the target object may be an object corresponding to in-focus information determined by the user. Referring to Fig. 8, if the user zooms the lens focal length to the in-focus focal length 3, the shutter button is not released, and the zoom ring is not turned again, however, the image of the object corresponding to the in-focus focal length 3 is already outside the focus frame , it can be determined that the condition for exiting the manual assisted focus mode has been satisfied.
  • the shooting device can only determine the in-focus information of the focus frame by adjusting the lens, and the target object is displaced in the opposite direction or in the opposite direction relative to the lens, wherein the focus frame includes multiple objects, and each object is combined with the in-focus information There is a second corresponding relationship between the in-focus information.
  • the in-focus information has been determined, if the target object is displaced in the opposite direction or in the opposite direction relative to the lens, it is not convenient to update or compensate the in-focus information through the contrast mode. In order to ensure the accuracy of the focus information, it may be determined that the current condition for exiting the manual assisted focus mode is satisfied.
  • the conditions for exiting the manual assisted focusing mode may also include at least one of the following: the inertial measurement unit has experienced a power-off operation, the camera or the gimbal After a power-off operation, the displacement of the camera or gimbal in the power-off state exceeds the recalibration displacement threshold, or the acceleration of the inertial measurement unit is greater than the set acceleration threshold.
  • the accuracy of the focus information cannot be guaranteed, and the manual assisted focus mode can be exited.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of an image displayed when exiting manual assisted focusing according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the upper left image is the image displayed in the focus frame after the user performs a zoom operation. There is a first distance between the user avatar and the leaves in the image. After completing the manual assisted focusing, the user can perform image acquisition operations.
  • the focused object moves out of the screen, the user releases the shutter button, or the focused object moves vertically (in contrast mode), then the manual assisted focusing mode can be exited.
  • the focus frame can return to the user-specified position in the normal preview mode, such as the center of the display screen.
  • the existing focus information may also be updated.
  • Fig. 17 is a schematic flowchart of a control method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • the above method may further include operation S1710.
  • the in-focus information set is compensated based on a change amount of the in-focus information in the in-focus information set.
  • compensating the focus information set based on the change amount of the focus information in the focus information set may include the following operations. First, determine the pose change information of the lens. Then, the focus information set is compensated based on the pose change information of the lens.
  • the in-focus information can be compensated according to the position change amount.
  • the in-focus focal length of the object in the focus frame is compensated according to the amount of change in the position of the camera.
  • the position change amount can be used as the object distance change amount of the shooting object relative to a certain lens, based on the object distance change amount, the image distance change amount for the certain lens can be determined, and then based on the distance change amount to determine
  • the set of focus information is compensated to ensure the accuracy of the focus information and improve the focus accuracy of the automatic zoom operation based on the focus information.
  • the object to be photographed may be stationary.
  • the IMU may be used to calculate the amount of change in the position of the photographing device to determine the amount of change in the distance between the photographing object and the photographing device.
  • the photographed object may also be moving.
  • the change amount of the distance between the photographed object and the photographic device determined in other ways may be optimized based on the position change amount of the photographic device calculated by the IMU.
  • the change amount of the distance between the shooting object and the shooting device may also be determined in the following manner.
  • TOF Time of Flight
  • CDAF screen contrast for focus position search
  • a scene in which the subject is moving is taken as an example for illustration.
  • determining the pose change information of the lens may include the following operations: determining the pose change information of the lens based on an inertial measurement unit, where the pose change information includes at least one of displacement information and angle change information.
  • TOF, CDAF and PDAF can obtain the in-focus information of the objects included in the focus frame when entering the manual assisted focus mode, and then use the position change of the shooting device calculated by the IMU to optimize such as TOF, CDAF or PDAF in some The distance measurement effect in the scene.
  • TOF needs to be equipped with a dedicated distance detection device, which is costly; some gimbals do not have this device, and a corresponding distance detection device needs to be added; the frame rate of TOF is low, such as 10fps, which may cause some key frames
  • the frame rate of TOF is low, such as 10fps, which may cause some key frames
  • the CDAF method has the same refresh rate as the screen, but consumes more computing resources; requires multi-frame convergence; and has obvious breathing effects, which cannot well meet the operational requirements for focus or zoom in some scenarios.
  • the PDAF method has the same refresh rate as the screen, but it has certain requirements for light intensity, which cannot meet the needs of follow-focus or zoom scenes when the light is poor.
  • Optimizing the distance measurement effect in some scenarios such as TOF, CDAF or PDAF based on the position change of the camera device calculated by the IMU may include the following operations.
  • the focus system obtains the focus information of each object in the focus frame through TOF, CDAF, or PDAF. Assuming that the target does not move, or the movement of the photographer is the main movement factor, at this time, use the IMU or IMU and Visual Inertial Odometry (Visual Inertial Odometry, VIO for short) to obtain the camera position change at a high frame rate.
  • VIO Visual Inertial Odometry
  • the calculated camera position change is used to estimate the relative distance change between the camera and the target, and is used to fine-tune the results of the focusing system (such as the upper key frame for missing the relative distance change between the camera and the target) Fine-tune the latest relative distance change in one frame or before to predict the relative distance change between the camera and the target corresponding to the key frame.
  • acc is the acceleration of translation
  • vel is the moving speed of the camera
  • the distance from the camera to the object can be expressed as shown in formula (5).
  • ⁇ d is the amount of position change
  • d 0 is the distance from the camera to the subject when the integration starts
  • d is the distance from the camera to the subject.
  • the acceleration data can be used to calculate ⁇ d in real time, but the initial distance is related to the shooting scene and can be determined by the methods mentioned above (TOF, etc.).
  • the focus information compensation is performed according to the object distance d, so that the image of the photographed object is clear.
  • the object distance d can be obtained by integrating the acceleration obtained by the IMU twice.
  • frame_width is the image width of the subject
  • view_width is the width of the subject, as shown in FIG. 6 .
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of compensating focus information provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • a user holds a camera or a gimbal carrying a camera to shoot a target object.
  • the composition can be adjusted according to the user's wishes.
  • the user can hold the pan-tilt to move horizontally and/or vertically relative to the subject to optimize the composition.
  • the distance between the camera and the subject changes. If you still use the existing in-focus focal length to shoot, it may cause the image of the subject in the captured image to be unclear. Therefore, the in-focus information may be compensated during the process of the user moving relative to the object to be photographed based on the method described above.
  • the IMU will send the detected 0.5 meters to the camera control unit, and the camera control unit will use the 0.5 meters to compensate the existing distance between the user and the subject. Then, the compensated in-focus focal length is determined based on the compensated distance, so as to update the in-focus focal length of the photographed object. It should be noted that the above 0.5 meters is only for the convenience of understanding the solution of this application. In fact, the IMU will output the displacement information of the camera according to the preset cycle.
  • the focus information such as the focal length of the collection can be updated in time.
  • the peak value calculates the moving distance based on the IMU to track the focus target and compensate the focus strength curve.
  • the IMU can be used to calculate the moving distance to compensate the in-focus intensity curve.
  • compensating the focus information set based on the change amount of the focus information in the focus information set may include the following operations. First, the pose change information of at least one object is determined. Then, based on the pose change information of the at least one object and the second corresponding relationship, the focus information corresponding to each of the at least one object in the focus information set is compensated.
  • the pose change information may include: position change information and/or attitude change information.
  • determining the pose change information of at least one object may include the following operations: first, determine at least one object included in the focus frame through image recognition, and then determine the position of at least one object included in the focus frame through image processing Posture change information.
  • the image of the object in the focus frame is obtained through image recognition, which facilitates the binding between the object image and the in-focus information, so as to update the in-focus information corresponding to the object image.
  • determining the pose change information of at least one object included in the focus frame through image processing may include the following operations. First, calculating displacement information of the sub-image of the at least one object in the current image. Then, based on the respective in-focus information of the at least one object and the displacement information of the at least one object in the current image, the pose change information for the at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is respectively calculated.
  • the in-focus information may include in-focus focal length and the like. For example, if the subject moves horizontally, the subject can be tracked visually, and the movement distance can be calculated in combination with lens parameters to compensate for the in-focus intensity curve.
  • the OSD and in-focus intensity curve can be calculated and updated in real time.
  • the contrast mode it is impossible to accurately compensate the focus intensity curve distance, and the user can be prompted to switch to the phase mode for compensation, or exit the manual assisted focus mode.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of compensating focus information according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • the camera determines the in-focus information corresponding to the target object
  • the camera does not move, and the target object moves in a vertical direction relative to the direction connecting the target object and the camera.
  • the in-focus information of the target object can be compensated. For example, if the in-focus focal length of the target object is known, the object distance d can be determined based on the in-focus focal length, and then the real moving distance of the target object can be calculated based on the moving distance of the image of the target object in the focus frame, so that The distance d' between the moving target object and the camera.
  • the focus frame includes multiple objects, and there is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the focus information in the focus information set.
  • compensating the focus information set based on the change amount of the focus information in the focus information set may include the following operations.
  • the pose change information of the lens and the pose change information of multiple objects included in the focus frame are determined.
  • the focus information set is compensated based on the pose change information of the lens and the pose change information of the multiple objects included in the focus frame.
  • the user can not only retain the flexibility of the user to quickly select the subject in the manual assisted focusing mode, but also realize fast and efficient automatic focusing, and can still focus quickly when the camera and the subject are moving , effectively improving the user experience.
  • the user can quickly and automatically find the closest corresponding focal length for zooming according to the existing focus strength information, which effectively improves the convenience of manual zooming .
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a two-dimensional OSD in-focus peak indication mechanism, which facilitates the user to intuitively determine the relationship between the current focal length and the in-focus focal length of the object in the focus frame, and facilitates the user to select the desired in-focus focal length.
  • the in-focus strength information of the object in the focus frame can be compensated, so that the user can realize the shooting method of focusing first and then composing the picture, and there is no need to change the composition Then perform the focusing operation again to meet the user's needs for diverse shooting techniques and improve the convenience of the focusing operation.
  • Another aspect of the present application also provides a shooting control device.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the photographing device 2000 carries a photographing device and an inertial measurement unit, and the inertial measurement unit is used to measure attitude information of the photographing device. As shown in FIG. 20 , the photographing device 2000 includes: at least one processor 2010 and a memory 2020 .
  • the memory 2020 stores computer-executable instructions.
  • At least one processor 2010 executes the computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 2020, so that the following steps are implemented when executing the computer-executed instructions:
  • a collection of in-focus information for at least one object in the in-focus frame of the current image is acquired.
  • a first operation is obtained, wherein the first operation includes a zoom operation or the first operation is directed to focus information in the focus information set.
  • the lens of the photographing device is controlled to automatically focus based on the focus information set.
  • the photographing device may be provided with an input unit and/or an output unit.
  • the input unit may be used to input the user's operation instructions to the photographing device, and the input unit may include a rotary wheel, buttons, and a touch screen for realizing human-computer interaction.
  • the component for realizing human-computer interaction may include a display screen for displaying an interactive interface, and the user may input control instructions in the interactive interface.
  • the photographing device may further include a display screen for displaying a user interaction interface.
  • the photographing device may further include a state (mode) prompting component.
  • the photographing device may include an indicator light.
  • the input unit may include other components or parts besides the wheels and keys for realizing human-machine interaction, for example, it may have a switch of the camera, and the like.
  • a processor may be provided in the input part for processing input control instructions, or sending and receiving signals, and the like.
  • the processor can also be arranged in the lens.
  • the processor can be a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, referred to as CPU), and the processor can also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (Digital Signal Processor, referred to as DSP), application-specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuit (ASIC for short), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (Field-Programmable Gate Array, FPGA for short) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, or the processor may be any conventional processor, or the like.
  • the processing unit can be connected with a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium 2020 .
  • the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium 2020 may store logic, code and/or computer instructions 2021 executed by the processing unit for performing one or more steps.
  • the non-volatile computer-readable storage medium 2020 may include one or more storage units (removable medium or external storage, such as SD card or RAM).
  • the measurement information of the IMU can be directly transmitted and stored in the storage unit of the non-volatile computer-readable storage medium 2020 .
  • the storage unit of the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium 2020 may store logic, codes and/or computer instructions 2021 executed by the processing unit to perform various embodiments of the various methods described herein.
  • the processing unit may be configured to execute instructions to cause one or more processors of the processing unit to perform the zoom and/or focus functions described above.
  • the storage unit of the non-volatile computer-readable storage medium 2020 can store the processing results generated by the processing unit.
  • the processing unit can be connected with the control module to control the state of the motor.
  • the processing unit can also be connected with the communication module to transmit and/or receive data with one or more peripheral devices (such as terminals, display devices, or other remote control devices).
  • peripheral devices such as terminals, display devices, or other remote control devices.
  • Any suitable communication method may be utilized here, such as wired communication or wireless communication.
  • the communication module may utilize one or more local area networks, wide area networks, infrared, wireless, Wi-Fi, peer-to-peer (P2P) networks, telecommunications networks, cloud networks, and the like.
  • relay stations such as signal towers, satellites, or mobile base stations, may be used.
  • the input module on the camera device may include one or more input mechanisms to obtain input generated by the user through operating the input module.
  • Input mechanisms include one or more joysticks, switches, knobs, slide switches, buttons, dials, touch screens, keypads, keyboards, voice controls, gesture controls, inertial modules, and the like.
  • An input module may be used to obtain user input for controlling any aspect such as a camera, lens, or components thereof.
  • the processing unit can be connected with the memory.
  • the memory includes volatile or non-volatile storage media for storing data, and/or logic, codes, and/or program instructions executable by the processing unit for executing one or more rules or functions.
  • the memory may include one or more storage units (removable media or external memory such as SD card or RAM).
  • the data input to the module can be directly transferred and stored in the storage unit of the memory.
  • the storage unit of the memory may store logic, code and/or computer instructions executed by the processing unit to perform various embodiments of the various methods described herein.
  • the processing unit can be used to execute instructions to cause one or more processors of the processing unit to process and display sensing data (such as images) obtained from a camera or motor, and control instructions generated based on user input, including motion instructions and target object information, and cause the communication module to transmit and/or receive data, etc.
  • the storage unit may store sensing data or other data received from an external device such as a mobile platform.
  • the storage unit of the memory may store the processing results generated by the processing unit.
  • the set of focus information includes parameters and focus strength associated with the lens.
  • the parameters associated with the lens include a focal length and a focus distance of the lens, wherein the focus distance is the distance between the subject and the lens.
  • the lens includes a zoom ring.
  • the first operation includes turning the zoom ring in a certain direction.
  • controlling the lens of the photographing device to automatically focus based on the focus information set includes: repeating the following operations until the focal length of the lens is changed to a focus focal length corresponding to the target object: in response to the first operation, controlling the lens The focal length is changed to the target focal length in the focus information set.
  • the target focal length is the focal length that is determined based on the current focal length of the lens and matched in the focus information set based on the rotation direction information of the zoom ring.
  • the target focal length includes any one of the following: the focal length in the focus information set with the smallest difference from the current focal length of the lens, or the focal length in the focus information set with the largest difference from the current focal length of the lens.
  • the computer program is processed to: obtain the rotation amount of the zoom ring during or after obtaining the first operation; determine the auxiliary focal length based on the current focal length of the lens and the rotation amount of the zoom ring; The auxiliary focal length determines the target focal length from the focus information set, wherein the target focal length is the auxiliary focal length as the initial focal length, and is matched in the focus information set according to the rotation direction information of the zoom ring, and the determined one is closest to the initial focal length focal length.
  • the shooting device includes a display screen for displaying at least one focus information in the focus information set, and the focus information includes a focus intensity peak value.
  • the display screen is also used to display an input component corresponding to the focus information set; in response to the first operation, controlling the lens of the camera to automatically focus based on the focus information set includes: responding to the user inputting the input component The operation is to determine the focal length of the target object corresponding to the target object from the in-focus information set.
  • the display screen is also used to display an in-focus intensity curve corresponding to the in-focus information set.
  • the in-focus intensity curve is generated by determining the in-focus information to be displayed, the in-focus information to be displayed is the focal length information in the in-focus information set that satisfies the display conditions, and the display conditions include the in-focus information to be displayed
  • the corresponding in-focus intensity is greater than or equal to a preset intensity threshold; an in-focus intensity curve is generated based on the in-focus information to be displayed.
  • obtaining the first operation includes at least one of the following: if the focus information set includes at least one focus information, in response to the rotation speed of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset rotation speed threshold, obtaining an automatic zoom operation ; or if at least one focus information is included in the focus information set, the automatic zoom operation is obtained in response to the rotation duration of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to the preset duration threshold; or if at least one focus information is included in the focus information set, In response to the rotation speed of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset rotation speed threshold, and the rotation duration of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset duration threshold, an automatic zoom operation is obtained.
  • the first operation includes a sub-region selection operation; in response to the first operation, control the shooting
  • the automatic focusing of the lens of the device based on the focus information set includes: determining the target focal length corresponding to the selected sub-region from the focus information set based on the first correspondence; and in response to the target focal length, controlling the lens of the shooting device to automatically focus.
  • obtaining the first operation includes: determining the selected sub-region in response to the selection operation on the sub-region in the focus frame; and determining from the in-focus information set based on the first correspondence target focal length.
  • acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image includes: obtaining the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image in response to the second operation indicating to enter the manual assisted focus mode.
  • acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image includes: in response to the second operation, acquiring the focus information set of the current image based on the sensor A collection of in-focus information for at least one object in the focus frame; and/or in response to the second operation, by adjusting the focal length of the lens, based on the pixel contrast of the at least one object in the focus frame of the current image, acquire the focus frame of the current image A collection of in-focus information for at least one object.
  • obtaining the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image includes: In the process of adjusting the focal length from the first preset focal length to the second preset focal length, the image information of multiple shooting surfaces is obtained; the in-focus shooting surface is determined from the multiple shooting surfaces, and there are adjacent images in the image information of the in-focus shooting surface. A pixel whose pixel contrast exceeds a preset contrast threshold; and at least part of the in-focus focal length corresponding to the in-focus shooting surface and the corresponding in-focus intensity are used as in-focus information.
  • adjusting the focal length of the lens from the first preset focal length to the second preset focal length includes: adjusting the focal length of the lens from the minimum focal length of the lens to the maximum focal length of the lens.
  • the lens includes a zoom ring; in response to the third operation representing the zoom trend, acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image includes: acquiring the third operation, the third operation causes zooming The ring rotates; in response to the third operation, during the process of adjusting the focal length of the lens from the current focal length to the maximum focal length or the minimum focal length, image information of multiple shooting surfaces is obtained; determining the in-focus shooting surface from the multiple shooting surfaces, and achieving focus In the image information of the shooting surface, there are pixels whose adjacent pixel contrast exceeds a preset contrast threshold; and at least part of the in-focus focal length and corresponding in-focus intensity are used as in-focus information.
  • obtaining the second operation includes at least one of the following: receiving an operation on a preset key, receiving an operation on a preset interactive component, or receiving a preset operation gesture.
  • obtaining the second operation includes: generating the second operation when the preset key is pressed with a first specified displacement, wherein the preset button has at least two specified displacements, and the first specified displacement is at least two specified displacements. One of the displacements.
  • the conditions for exiting the manual assisted focusing mode include at least one of the following: the preset button is in a state corresponding to exiting the manual assisted focusing mode; the target object moves out of the focus frame, wherein there are multiple There is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the focus information in the focus information set; the shooting device can only determine the focus information of the focus frame by adjusting the lens, and the target object is displaced in the opposite direction or relative to the lens. Displacement in the back direction, wherein the focus frame includes a plurality of objects, and there is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the focus information in the focus information set.
  • compensating the focus information set based on the change amount of the focus information in the focus information set includes: determining the pose change information of the lens; compensate.
  • determining the pose change information of the at least one object includes: determining at least one object included in the focus frame through image recognition; and determining the pose change information of the at least one object included in the focus frame through image processing.
  • the focus frame includes multiple objects, and there is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the focus information in the focus information set.
  • compensating the focus information set based on the change amount of the focus information in the focus information set includes: determining the pose change information of the lens and the pose change information of multiple objects included in the focus frame; The pose change information and the pose change information of multiple objects included in the focus frame are used to compensate the focus information set.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing device provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • the photographing device including a lens and a camera body, is used to capture an object and obtain an image after the motor drives the lens to zoom or focus.
  • the camera body may be a camera body of a handheld SLR or mirrorless camera.
  • a lens is a lens that includes a zoom ring and a follow focus ring, such as a manual lens.
  • the lens in this embodiment can also support manual focus and follow focus.
  • the photographing device may include a zoom ring coupled to the optical assembly, the optical assembly may include a plurality of lenses, and the zoom ring may be used to adjust the focus of the optical assembly.
  • the zoom ring may include a mechanical adjustment device. When the user turns the zoom ring, the focus of the optical assembly will change as the zoom ring is turned.
  • the zoom ring can also include one or more adjustment buttons or adjustment wheels, which can be set on the optical assembly or the body, and when used to press the adjustment button or turn the adjustment wheel, the shooting The device will generate electrical signals for instructing how to adjust the focus of the optical assembly, eg how to adjust the rotational direction and/or rotational distance of one or more optical elements in the optical assembly.
  • the electrical signal can instruct a motor mounted on the optical assembly or the body to rotate to drive the optical assembly to focus.
  • the adjustment button or adjustment wheel may be a mechanical adjustment button or adjustment wheel, or may be a virtual adjustment button or adjustment wheel displayed on a display screen.
  • the photographing device may further include a control device, and the control device may be disposed on the body, or the control device may be a part of the body.
  • the control device can be independent from the fuselage, or can be coupled with the fuselage.
  • the control device can execute the control methods of the subsequent embodiments.
  • the control device includes a memory and a processor.
  • the memory is used to store program codes.
  • the processor can call the program codes. When the program codes are executed, the processor is used to execute the control methods of the subsequent embodiments.
  • the memory includes non-random computer-readable storage media such as random access memory (RAM), read-only memory, flash memory, hard disk memory, or optical media, among others.
  • Processor 1084 and/or processor 1164 include any suitable hardware processor, such as a microprocessor, a microcontroller, a central processing unit (CPU), a graphics processing unit (GPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal Processor (DSP), Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • the photographing device may also include sensors such as a gyroscope for determining the distance between the camera and the subject.
  • sensors such as a gyroscope for determining the distance between the camera and the subject.
  • an inertial measurement unit IMU
  • the IMU includes an accelerometer, so that the displacement of the camera can be calculated according to the acceleration output by the accelerometer.
  • Another aspect of the present application also provides a shooting system.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the photographing system may include a photographing device and a supporting structure, and the supporting structure is used to carry the photographing device.
  • the cloud platform can be used to carry the photographing device.
  • the photographing device can be fixed on the platform in a detachable manner through structural fixation (such as being fixed by a photographing device fixing mechanism).
  • An IMU can be set on the gimbal.
  • the IMU includes an accelerometer, so that the acceleration information collected based on the accelerometer is integrated to obtain velocity information, and the velocity information is integrated to obtain displacement information.
  • the measurement information collected by the IMU may include the amount of position change of the photographing device corresponding to different sampling moments. If the distance difference between the IMU and the photographing device is a fixed value, the distance change between the IMU and the photographing device may be used as the distance change between the subject and the photographing device.
  • the reference plane of the IMU is located below the camera.
  • the calculation processing of the position change amount may be processed by a controller in the IMU or a controller in the motor, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the shooting device fixing mechanism of the pan/tilt can fixedly connect the motor to the bottom of the camera body, and the lens is mounted on the camera body through a bayonet.
  • a focus wheel and/or a zoom wheel can be set on the pan/tilt, and the focus wheel and/or zoom wheel can push the current rotation position and speed data of the focus wheel or the zoom wheel to the shooting device, so as to achieve zooming or focus.
  • a motor for determining the zoom ring or focus ring can be provided on the gimbal, and the focus wheel and/or zoom wheel can send data such as the current rotational position and rotational speed of the focus wheel or zoom wheel to the motor, so that The motor turns to the specified position corresponding to the focus wheel or the zoom wheel.
  • a display screen can be set on the pan/tilt, and during the focus or zoom process using the control method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the user can also switch the automatic mode to the manual mode by inputting a control command on the display screen to select a mode, Or switch from manual mode to manual assisted focus mode, and use the focus wheel or zoom wheel to control the position of the motor to achieve focus or zoom.
  • the shooting control device includes: at least one processor and memory.
  • the memory stores computer-executable instructions.
  • At least one processor executes the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory, so that at least some of the steps shown above are implemented when the computer-executable instructions are executed.
  • the above steps can also be completed by the cooperation of the pan/tilt and the shooting device, for example:
  • the pan/tilt determines the position change amount of the camera carried by the pan/tilt in a specific direction through the measurement information of the accelerometer in the inertial measurement unit; the pan/tilt transmits the position change amount to the camera, and the camera determines the position change amount according to the Update the in-focus information corresponding to the target object, and the lens performs autofocus according to the in-focus focal length.
  • the communication module of the pan/tilt can be used to transmit and/or receive data from one or more remote devices (such as mobile platforms, base stations, etc.).
  • the communication module can transmit control signals (such as motion signals, target object information, and tracking control instructions) to peripheral systems or devices, such as the above-mentioned centering platform and/or load.
  • the communication module may include a transmitter and a receiver for receiving data from the remote device and transmitting data to the remote device, respectively.
  • the communication module may include a transceiver, which combines the functions of a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transmitter and receiver can communicate with each other and with the processing unit. Communication may utilize any suitable means of communication, such as wired communication or wireless communication.
  • the gimbal shown in Figure 22 is a handheld gimbal.
  • the gimbal can be set on a mobile platform.
  • the images captured by the mobile platform during its movement can be transmitted back from the mobile platform or imaging device to the control terminal or other suitable devices for display, playback, storage, editing or other purposes. Such transmission may occur in real-time or near real-time as the imaging device captures the imagery. Optionally, there may be a delay between image capture and transmission.
  • the imagery may be stored in the memory of the mobile platform without being transmitted anywhere else. Users can view these images in real time and, if desired, adjust target object information or adjust other aspects of the mobile platform or its components. The adjusted target object information may be provided to the mobile platform, and the iterative process may continue until a desired image is obtained.
  • images may be transmitted from the camera and/or the control terminal to the remote server. For example, images can be shared on some social networking platforms, such as WeChat Moments or Weibo.
  • each of the above operations can be performed by a hand-held camera.
  • the corresponding functions can be realized by an input unit of the camera, a processor installed in the camera, and a driver installed in the lens.
  • the following takes the hand-held pan/tilt as an example to illustrate the execution subject of the above operations.
  • operations related to driving the lens to move can be performed by the lens of the camera.
  • the rest of the operations can be performed by a camera or a handheld pan/tilt.
  • the corresponding functions can be realized by the input unit of the handheld pan/tilt, the processor of the camera, and the like.
  • the operation of acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may be performed by the camera.
  • the obtaining first operation may be performed by a camera or a gimbal. Controlling the automatic focusing of the lens of the shooting device based on the focus information set can be performed by the camera.
  • the operation of acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may be performed by the camera.
  • the obtaining the first operation may be performed by a camera or a remote control of the mobile platform. Controlling the lens of the shooting device to automatically focus based on the focus information set can be performed by the camera.
  • the execution subject of the above operations is only an example and should not be construed as a limitation to the present application. It can be completed independently by one of the mobile platform, the control terminal, and the shooting device, or several of them cooperate.
  • a human-computer interaction module such as a display for displaying the human-computer interaction interface, etc.
  • independent completion includes actively or passively, directly or indirectly acquiring corresponding data from other devices to perform corresponding operations.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program, and the computer program includes program code for executing the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the computer program product is run on the electronic device, the The program code is used to enable the electronic device to implement the control method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the computer program may rely on tangible storage media such as optical storage devices and magnetic storage devices.
  • the computer program can also be transmitted and distributed in the form of a signal on a network medium, and downloaded and installed through the communication part, and/or installed from a removable medium.
  • the program code contained in the computer program can be transmitted by any appropriate network medium, including but not limited to: wireless, wired, etc., or any appropriate combination of the above.
  • the program codes for executing the computer programs provided by the embodiments of the present application can be written in any combination of one or more programming languages, specifically, high-level process and/or object-oriented programming language, and/or assembly/machine language to implement these computing programs.
  • Programming languages include, but are not limited to, programming languages such as Java, C++, python, "C" or similar programming languages.
  • the program code can execute entirely on the user computing device, partly on the user device, partly on the remote computing device, or entirely on the remote computing device or server.
  • the remote computing device may be connected to the user computing device through any kind of network, including a local area network (LAN) or a wide area network (WAN), or may be connected to an external computing device (e.g., using an Internet service provider). business to connect via the Internet).
  • LAN local area network
  • WAN wide area network
  • Internet service provider an Internet service provider

Abstract

A control method, an image capture apparatus, and an image capture system. The control method comprises: acquiring a focus information set for at least one object in a focus frame of a current image; obtaining a first operation, the first operation comprising a zoom operation or the first operation being for focus information in the focus information set; and in response to the first operation, controlling a lens of an image capture apparatus to automatically focus on the basis of the focus information set.

Description

控制方法、拍摄装置和拍摄系统Control method, shooting device and shooting system 技术领域technical field
本申请涉及控制技术领域,尤其涉及一种控制方法、拍摄装置和拍摄系统。The present application relates to the technical field of control, and in particular to a control method, a photographing device and a photographing system.
背景技术Background technique
手动对焦是通过转动镜头的变焦环或者按压机身上的方向键等,以步进的形式进行对焦,以便得到针对目标对象的清晰图像。在数码相机时代,手动对焦可以是自动对焦的有力补充。然而,手动对焦的操作便捷度较低,并且,对焦准确度对用户的对焦操作水平和视力水平等依赖度较高。Manual focus is to focus in steps by turning the zoom ring of the lens or pressing the direction keys on the body, so as to obtain a clear image of the target object. In the age of digital cameras, manual focus can be a powerful complement to autofocus. However, the operation convenience of manual focusing is relatively low, and the focusing accuracy is highly dependent on the user's focusing operation level and eyesight level.
发明内容Contents of the invention
有鉴于此,本申请实施例提供一种控制方法、拍摄装置和拍摄系统,以提升手动对焦的便捷度,并且降低对焦准确度对用户的对焦操作水平和视力水平的依赖度。In view of this, embodiments of the present application provide a control method, a photographing device, and a photographing system to improve the convenience of manual focusing and reduce the dependence of focusing accuracy on the user's focusing operation level and vision level.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种应用于拍摄装置的控制方法,该方法包括:获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合;获得第一操作,其中,第一操作包括变焦操作或者第一操作是针对合焦信息集合中的合焦信息;以及响应于第一操作,控制拍摄装置的镜头基于合焦信息集合自动对焦。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a control method applied to a photographing device, the method including: acquiring a focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image; obtaining a first operation, wherein the first The operation includes a zoom operation or the first operation is directed to the focus information in the focus information set; and in response to the first operation, the lens of the camera is controlled to automatically focus based on the focus information set.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种拍摄控制装置,该装置包括:镜头,用于采集图像;一个或多个处理器;存储装置,用于存储一个或多个计算机程序,计算机程序在被处理器执行时,实现如上的方法。In the second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a shooting control device, which includes: a lens for capturing images; one or more processors; a storage device for storing one or more computer programs, and the computer programs are stored in When executed by the processor, the above method is realized.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种拍摄系统,包括:如上的拍摄装置;以及支承机构,其支承拍摄装置。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a photographing system, including: the above photographing device; and a supporting mechanism, which supports the photographing device.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种可读存储介质,可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序;计算机程序在被执行时,实现如第一方面本申请实施例的控制方法。In a fourth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a readable storage medium, on which a computer program is stored; when the computer program is executed, the control method as in the embodiment of the present application in the first aspect is implemented.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序,包括可执行指令,该可执行指令在被执行时,实现如上的方法。In a fifth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a computer program, including executable instructions, and when the executable instructions are executed, implement the above method.
在本申请实施例中,在确定了针对当前图像的对焦框之后,获取对焦框中包括的一个或多个对象的合焦信息。这样使得拍摄装置可以根据该合焦信息和变焦触发操作自动变焦至与某个合焦信息对应的焦距。与相关技术中的手动变焦需要手动从当前焦距调整至目标焦距不同的是,本申请实施例中自动确定对焦框中包括的对象的合焦信息,这样使得只需 要得到变焦触发操作或针对某个合焦信息的变焦触发操作,即可实现基于合焦信息的自动对焦。用户在手动辅助对焦过程中,对人为判断是否已变焦至与某个对象对应的合焦焦距的依赖性较低。本申请实施例在满足用户的手动对焦需求的前提下,利用自动变焦技术给手动变焦操作提供辅助,提升了手动对焦的便捷度,并且降低了对焦准确度对用户的对焦操作水平和视力水平的依赖度,有效提升用户手动变焦体验。In the embodiment of the present application, after the focus frame for the current image is determined, in-focus information of one or more objects included in the focus frame is acquired. In this way, the photographing device can automatically zoom to a focal length corresponding to certain focus information according to the focus information and the zoom trigger operation. Unlike the manual zooming in the related art that needs to be manually adjusted from the current focal length to the target focal length, in the embodiment of the present application, the in-focus information of the object included in the focus frame is automatically determined, so that only the zoom trigger operation or for a certain The zoom trigger operation of the in-focus information can realize autofocus based on the in-focus information. During the process of manual assisted focusing, the user is less dependent on human judgment whether the zoom has reached the in-focus focal length corresponding to a certain object. On the premise of meeting the user's manual focus requirements, the embodiment of the present application uses the automatic zoom technology to provide assistance to the manual zoom operation, which improves the convenience of manual focus and reduces the impact of focus accuracy on the user's focus operation level and vision level. Dependency, effectively improving the user's manual zoom experience.
本申请的附加方面的优点将在下面的描述中部分给出,部分将从下面的描述中变得明显,或通过本申请的实践了解到。Advantages of additional aspects of the application will be set forth in the description which follows, and in part will be obvious from the description, or may be learned by practice of the application.
附图说明Description of drawings
通过参照附图的以下详细描述,本申请实施例的上述和其他目的、特征和优点将变得更容易理解。在附图中,将以示例以及非限制性的方式对本申请的多个实施例进行说明,其中:The above and other objects, features and advantages of the embodiments of the present application will become more comprehensible through the following detailed description with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the accompanying drawings, several embodiments of the present application will be described by way of example and non-limitation, wherein:
图1为本申请实施例提供的控制方法、拍摄装置和拍摄系统的应用场景;FIG. 1 is an application scenario of a control method, a photographing device, and a photographing system provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的拍摄装置的方框图;FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a photographing device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的改变镜片间距离来调整焦距的示意图;Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of adjusting the focal length by changing the distance between the lenses provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的镜头的示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a lens provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的控制方法的流程示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a control method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的镜头的焦距和对焦距离的示意图;Fig. 6 is a schematic diagram of the focal length and focus distance of the lens provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的对焦框、对象和合焦信息的示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the focus frame, object and focus information provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的基于变焦环进行手动辅助对焦的过程示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the process of manual assisted focusing based on the zoom ring provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请另一实施例提供的基于变焦环进行手动辅助对焦的过程示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the process of manual assisted focusing based on the zoom ring provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的基于合焦信息进行手动辅助对焦的过程示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the process of manually assisting focusing based on focus information provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的合焦强度曲线的示意图;Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of the in-focus intensity curve provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的处理后的合焦强度曲线的示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the processed in-focus intensity curve provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请另一实施例提供的基于合焦信息进行手动辅助对焦的过程示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a process of manually assisting focusing based on focus information provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的预设按键状态与显示屏上对应显示图像的示意图;FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the preset key state and the corresponding display image on the display screen provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图15为本申请另一实施例提供的控制方法的流程示意图;FIG. 15 is a schematic flowchart of a control method provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的退出手动辅助对焦时显示图像的示意图;FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of an image displayed when exiting manual assisted focusing provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图17为本申请另一实施例提供的控制方法的流程示意图;FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of a control method provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图18为本申请实施例提供的对合焦信息进行补偿的示意图;FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of compensating focus information provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图19为本申请另一实施例提供的对合焦信息进行补偿的示意图;FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of compensating focus information provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图20为本申请实施例提供的拍摄装置的结构示意图;FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图21为本申请另一实施例提供的拍摄装置的结构示意图;Fig. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing device provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图22为本申请实施例提供的拍摄系统的结构示意图。FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面详细描述本申请的实施例,实施例的示例在附图中示出,其中自始至终相同或类似的标号表示相同或类似的元件或具有相同或类似功能的元件。下面通过参考附图描述的实施例是示例性的,旨在用于解释本申请,而不能理解为对本申请的限制。Embodiments of the present application are described in detail below, and examples of the embodiments are shown in the drawings, wherein the same or similar reference numerals denote the same or similar elements or elements having the same or similar functions throughout. The embodiments described below by referring to the figures are exemplary, and are intended to explain the present application, and should not be construed as limiting the present application.
需要说明的是,当组件被称为“固定于”另一个组件,它可以直接在另一个组件上或者也可以存在居中的组件。当一个组件被认为是“承载有”另一个组件,该另一个组件可以是承载在该组件的表面上,或者设置在该组件的内部,或者设置在该组件承载的其它组件的内部或表面。当一个组件被认为是“连接”另一个组件,它可以是直接连接到另一个组件或者可能同时存在居中组件。It should be noted that when a component is said to be "fixed" to another component, it can be directly on the other component or there can also be an intervening component. When a component is considered to be "carrying" another component, the other component may be carried on a surface of the component, or disposed within the component, or disposed within or on the surface of another component carried by the component. When a component is said to be "connected" to another component, it may be directly connected to the other component or there may be intervening components at the same time.
除非另有定义,本文所使用的所有的技术和科学术语与属于本申请的技术领域的技术人员通常理解的含义相同。本文中在本申请的说明书中所使用的术语只是为了描述具体的实施例的目的,不是旨在于限制本申请。本文所使用的术语“和/或”包括一个或多个相关的所列项目的任意的和所有的组合。术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个特征。Unless otherwise defined, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the technical field to which this application belongs. The terms used herein in the specification of the application are only for the purpose of describing specific embodiments, and are not intended to limit the application. As used herein, the term "and/or" includes any and all combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. The terms "first" and "second" are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Thus, features defined as "first" and "second" may explicitly or implicitly include one or more features.
随着相机技术的不断发展产生了多种相机种类。例如,单反、微单相机等,可以配置有变焦镜头或定焦镜头。变焦镜头可以有跟焦、变焦、光圈等参数。在数码相机时代,手动对焦(MF)是自动对焦(AF)的有力补充,在数码时代,在一些应用场景中,MF仍然是不可或缺的功能。With the continuous development of camera technology, various types of cameras have been produced. For example, a single-lens reflex camera, a mirrorless camera, etc., can be configured with a zoom lens or a fixed-focus lens. A zoom lens can have parameters such as follow focus, zoom, and aperture. In the era of digital cameras, manual focus (MF) is a powerful supplement to auto focus (AF). In the digital age, MF is still an indispensable function in some application scenarios.
用户进行手动对焦时,可以手动转动变焦环等来调节相机镜头的焦距,从而得到针对目标对象的清晰图像。手动对焦方式很大程度上依赖于人眼对显示屏上的影像或对取景框中对象的清晰度的判别,此外拍摄效果还与拍摄者的熟练程度、甚至拍摄者的视力等相关。传统的单镜反光相机与旁轴相机大多使用手动对焦来完成变焦操作。多种准专业及专业数码相机,还有单反数码相机都设有手动对焦的功能,以配合不同的拍摄需要。When the user performs manual focusing, he can manually turn the zoom ring to adjust the focal length of the camera lens, so as to obtain a clear image of the target object. The manual focus method largely depends on the human eye's judgment on the image on the display screen or the sharpness of the object in the viewfinder. In addition, the shooting effect is also related to the photographer's proficiency and even the photographer's vision. Traditional single-lens reflex cameras and rangefinder cameras mostly use manual focus to complete the zoom operation. A variety of quasi-professional and professional digital cameras, as well as SLR digital cameras, are equipped with manual focus functions to meet different shooting needs.
手动对焦可分两种:电子式手动对焦和全时机械式手动对焦。其中,电子式手动对焦 可以搭配在大口径长焦镜头上。例如,电子式手动对焦的电子回路检测变焦环的转动量,再基于该转动量控制马达驱动镜头的镜片组变焦至与该转动量对应的焦距。全时机械式手动对焦,不需消耗电力,是通过不同于AF时的滚轴、转环来带动镜片组移动。Manual focus can be divided into two types: electronic manual focus and full-time mechanical manual focus. Among them, the electronic manual focus can be matched with a large aperture telephoto lens. For example, the electronic circuit of the electronic manual focus detects the amount of rotation of the zoom ring, and based on the amount of rotation, controls the motor to drive the lens group of the lens to zoom to a focal length corresponding to the amount of rotation. Full-time mechanical manual focus does not require power consumption, and the lens group is driven to move through rollers and swivels different from AF.
在进行手动对焦时,合焦条件下拍摄的目标对象可以清晰地呈现在显示屏上,清晰度可以由用户进行判断。在某些实施例中,在使用手动对焦镜头时,相机机身可以在满足合焦条件时给用户一个参考合焦指示。对焦屏会提供辅助对焦的手段如菲涅尔镜、裂像,也可以外接取景放大目镜、取景放大镜等以提高手动对焦精度。有些自动镜头的手动对焦功能不是通过纯机械转动传导力实现的,而是有一个步进电机对镜头进行驱动。当用户转动变焦环,镜头内的电机会与用户转动做几乎同步的转动以驱动镜片对焦。这种方式的优点是结构简单且镜筒内部密封较好,但是会存在一定的延迟。这种技术可以在大口径长焦镜头或其它具有变焦环的镜头中使用,变焦环只是起到一个传感器的作用,并未与对焦镜组有机械连接,结构简化可以令镜头体积更小。本申请实施例中所采用的镜头中可以包括上述步进电机,以实现手动辅助对焦。当然,也可以通过外置电机的方式实现手动辅助对焦。When performing manual focus, the target object photographed under in-focus conditions can be clearly presented on the display screen, and the clarity can be judged by the user. In some embodiments, when using a manual focus lens, the camera body can give the user a reference focus indication when the focus condition is met. The focusing screen will provide focusing aids such as Fresnel lens and split image, and can also be connected with an external viewfinder magnifying eyepiece, viewfinder magnifying glass, etc. to improve the accuracy of manual focus. The manual focusing function of some automatic lenses is not realized by pure mechanical rotation transmission force, but has a stepping motor to drive the lens. When the user turns the zoom ring, the motor inside the lens will rotate almost synchronously with the user's rotation to drive the lens to focus. The advantage of this method is that the structure is simple and the interior of the lens barrel is well sealed, but there will be a certain delay. This technology can be used in large-aperture telephoto lenses or other lenses with a zoom ring. The zoom ring only acts as a sensor and is not mechanically connected to the focusing lens group. The simplified structure can make the lens smaller. The lens used in the embodiment of the present application may include the above-mentioned stepping motor to realize manual assisted focusing. Of course, manual assisted focusing can also be achieved through an external motor.
此外,以数码相机为例,手动对焦还可以在自动对焦失误时使用。具体表现在景物反差小、主体背景反差过大、环境亮度低、环境亮度过高、有高亮度光源干扰、需要透过透明屏障如玻璃拍摄、主体在对焦区域外等情况,都需要使用手动对焦。具有实时取景的相机可以通过放大图像以轻松使用手动对焦,并达到合焦准确。In addition, taking digital cameras as an example, manual focus can also be used when autofocus fails. Specifically, manual focus is required when the contrast of the scene is small, the contrast between the subject and the background is too large, the ambient brightness is low, the ambient brightness is too high, there is interference from a high-brightness light source, it needs to be shot through a transparent barrier such as glass, and the subject is outside the focus area. . Cameras with live view can easily use manual focus by zooming in on the image and achieve accurate focus.
然而,手动对焦技术也存在多种问题,如用户需要精确地转动变焦环以使得图像中针对目标对象的图像变清晰。然而,用户不易确定在当前焦距下目标对象是否已处于合焦状态,需要用户反复来回转动变焦环以确定针对目标对象的合焦焦距,这不仅仅依赖于用户的操作经验,同时还依赖于用户的视力水平以确定清晰度的变化趋势等。However, there are various problems in the manual focus technology, for example, the user needs to turn the zoom ring precisely to make the image of the target object in the image clear. However, it is not easy for the user to determine whether the target object is in focus at the current focal length, and the user needs to turn the zoom ring back and forth repeatedly to determine the in-focus focal length for the target object, which not only depends on the user's operating experience, but also depends on the user's The level of visual acuity to determine the trend of changes in clarity, etc.
本申请实施例提供的控制方法、拍摄装置和拍摄系统,可以有效提升用户在进行手动对焦操作时的便捷度,并且降低手动对焦对用户的对焦经验和视力水平等的依赖,提升用户体验。The control method, photographing device, and photographing system provided in the embodiments of the present application can effectively improve the convenience of the user when performing manual focusing operations, reduce the dependence of manual focusing on the user's focusing experience and vision level, and improve user experience.
此外,本申请实施例提供的控制方法、拍摄装置和拍摄系统为了满足用户对多场景下的手动对焦需求,可以在镜头和目标对象之间的位置关系发生改变时,自动对对焦框中对象的合焦信息进行补偿以提升合焦信息的准确度。例如,对于搭载手动变焦镜头的拍摄装置,可以通过惯性测量单元(Inertial Measurement Unit,简称IMU)(如相机或云台上原有的IMU或外挂的IMU)、测距仪等输出的测量信息估算镜头相对于目标对象之间的距离改变量,根据距离改变量对合焦信息进行补偿。让新手用户也能在复杂场景(如用户移动 和/或目标对象移动的场景)中也能拍摄出针对目标对象的清晰图像。In addition, in order to meet the user's need for manual focusing in multiple scenes, the control method, shooting device, and shooting system provided in the embodiments of the present application can automatically focus on the object in the focus frame when the positional relationship between the lens and the target object changes. The focus information is compensated to improve the accuracy of the focus information. For example, for a shooting device equipped with a manual zoom lens, the lens can be estimated through the measurement information output by the inertial measurement unit (IMU) (such as the original IMU on the camera or the gimbal or the external IMU), the rangefinder, etc. With respect to the distance change amount between target objects, the in-focus information is compensated according to the distance change amount. Allows novice users to capture clear images of the target object even in complex scenes such as scenes where the user is moving and/or the target object is moving.
需要说明的是,以上拍摄场景可以是针对人物拍摄、动物拍摄、静景拍摄、动景拍摄、视频拍摄、电影拍摄、电视剧拍摄等的拍摄场景。以上场景仅为示例性说明,不能理解为对本申请的限制。例如,可以适用于需要进行手动变焦操作的多种场景中。It should be noted that the above shooting scenes may be shooting scenes for people shooting, animal shooting, still scene shooting, moving scene shooting, video shooting, movie shooting, TV series shooting and the like. The above scenarios are illustrative only, and should not be construed as limitations on the present application. For example, it can be applied to various scenarios requiring manual zooming operations.
为了便于理解本申请的技术方案,以下结合图1~图22进行详细说明。In order to facilitate the understanding of the technical solution of the present application, a detailed description will be given below in conjunction with FIGS. 1 to 22 .
图1为本申请实施例提供的控制方法、拍摄装置和拍摄系统的应用场景。Fig. 1 is an application scenario of a control method, a photographing device and a photographing system provided in an embodiment of the present application.
如图1所示,用户在使用拍摄装置进行拍摄时,首先需要进行取景,在确定所需拍摄的景象后,需要通过变焦操作调整目标对象的图像清晰度,以得到用户满意的拍摄图像。用户可以通过手动对焦的方式来调整目标对象的图像清晰度,但是该过程对用户的手动对焦操作的熟练度、用户的视力水平等依赖度较高。As shown in FIG. 1 , when a user uses a camera to take pictures, he first needs to find a view. After determining the scene to be shot, he needs to adjust the image definition of the target object through a zoom operation to obtain a satisfactory image for the user. The user can adjust the image definition of the target object through manual focusing, but this process is highly dependent on the user's proficiency in manual focusing operations, the user's vision level, and the like.
此外,用户也可以通过自动对焦的方式来获取针对目标对象的清晰图像。但是,自动对焦方式中目标对象是由拍摄装置通过算法来自动确定的,可能存在对焦框中目标对象的图像没有对焦框中非目标对象的图像清晰的情形发生,并且不容易进行调整。In addition, users can also obtain a clear image of the target object through automatic focusing. However, in the auto-focus mode, the target object is automatically determined by the camera through an algorithm, and the image of the target object in the focus frame may not be as clear as the image of the non-target object in the focus frame, and it is not easy to adjust.
图1中拍摄设备可以是相机、摄像机或其他具有拍摄功能的设备例如智能终端等。拍摄功能是指具有拍摄静态图像和/或动态图像的功能。具体地,拍摄设备可以是手动控制的拍摄设备,也可以是自动拍摄设备,自动拍摄设备可具有手动对焦模式和自动对焦模式。在自动对焦模式下,拍摄设备可以自动调节其光学组件例如镜头,例如,自动对焦马达可控制镜头转动,以调节镜头的焦距。手动对焦模式是自动对焦模式的重要补充,例如,当环境照明太暗时,自动对焦马达无法精确的控制镜头转动,此时需要进行手动对焦。当用户对相机进行手动对焦时,用户需要慢慢的转动相机的变焦环,并在转动变焦环的过程中,通过人眼观测屏幕上的对象是否清晰,当用户观测到屏幕上的对象的图像足够清晰时停止转动变焦环。在手动对焦的过程中,用户需要不断的转动变焦环,才能找到较佳的对焦位置,无法快速准确地找到对象合焦时的对焦位置。The photographing device in FIG. 1 may be a camera, a video camera, or other devices with a photographing function such as an intelligent terminal. The shooting function refers to the function of shooting still images and/or moving images. Specifically, the shooting device may be a manually controlled shooting device, or may be an automatic shooting device, and the automatic shooting device may have a manual focus mode and an automatic focus mode. In the auto-focus mode, the photographing device can automatically adjust its optical components such as the lens. For example, the auto-focus motor can control the rotation of the lens to adjust the focal length of the lens. The manual focus mode is an important supplement to the auto focus mode. For example, when the ambient lighting is too dark, the auto focus motor cannot precisely control the rotation of the lens, and manual focus is required at this time. When the user manually focuses on the camera, the user needs to slowly turn the zoom ring of the camera, and in the process of turning the zoom ring, observe whether the object on the screen is clear through human eyes, when the user observes the image of the object on the screen Stop turning the zoom ring when it is clear enough. In the process of manual focusing, the user needs to continuously rotate the zoom ring to find a better focus position, and cannot quickly and accurately find the focus position when the object is in focus.
拍摄设备可以是手持的拍摄设备,也可以是搭载在可移动平台例如无人机上的拍摄设备。The shooting device may be a handheld shooting device, or a shooting device mounted on a movable platform such as a drone.
以用户手持相机对目标人物进行拍摄为例,用户可以采用手动辅助对焦的方式进行对焦。例如,用户控制相机进入手动模式后,可以通过半按快门按键的方式在相机的显示屏上显示对焦框,并获取对焦框中一个或多个对象的合焦信息,然后响应于用户转动变焦环或点击变焦按钮等方式触发自动变焦,使得相机的镜头变焦至与目标对象对应的合焦信息的合焦焦距。以用户手持云台为例,云台上可以承载有相机,云台上设置有机械按键等对 相机进行操作。如云台上可以设置有相机对焦模式选择按钮、焦距调整按钮等。Taking a user holding a camera to shoot a target person as an example, the user may use a manual assisted focusing method to focus. For example, after the user controls the camera to enter manual mode, the focus frame can be displayed on the camera's display screen by half-pressing the shutter button, and the in-focus information of one or more objects in the focus frame can be obtained, and then respond to the user turning the zoom ring Or click a zoom button to trigger automatic zooming, so that the lens of the camera zooms to the in-focus focal length corresponding to the in-focus information of the target object. Take the user holding the gimbal as an example, the gimbal can carry a camera, and there are mechanical buttons on the gimbal to operate the camera. For example, a camera focus mode selection button, a focus adjustment button, etc. may be provided on the pan/tilt.
参考图1所示,相机的显示界面中可以显示有取景的图像和对焦框。对焦框中可以包括一个或多个对象,相机自动确定与该一个或多个对象对应的合焦信息。这些合焦信息可以展示在显示界面上。如图1的显示界面中显示有与合焦信息对应的焦距条,该焦距条上具有一个或多个合焦焦距。此外,图1的显示界面中还可以存在当前焦距标志(参考图1中无填充三角形)、合焦指示标志(参考图1中有填充三角形)等。Referring to FIG. 1 , the camera's display interface may display a framing image and a focus frame. The focus frame may include one or more objects, and the camera automatically determines focus information corresponding to the one or more objects. The in-focus information can be displayed on the display interface. In the display interface as shown in FIG. 1 , a focus distance bar corresponding to the in-focus information is displayed, and the focus distance bar has one or more in-focus focal lengths. In addition, the display interface of FIG. 1 may also have a current focus mark (refer to the unfilled triangle in FIG. 1 ), an in-focus indicator (refer to the filled triangle in FIG. 1 ), and the like.
此外,本申请实施例中还可以对因拍摄对象与拍摄装置之间的距离发生改变导致的合焦信息不准确进行补偿。如拍摄对象和/或拍摄装置可能发生移动行为,这会导致拍摄对象与拍摄装置之间的距离发生改变,造成已有的对焦框中针对拍摄对象的合焦信息不准确。本申请实施例可以基于拍摄对象和/或拍摄装置发生的位移对与拍摄对象对应的合焦信息进行补偿,以提升对焦准确度和对焦操作便捷度。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, inaccurate focus information caused by a change in the distance between the photographed object and the photographing device can also be compensated. For example, the subject and/or the photographing device may move, which will cause the distance between the subject and the photographing device to change, resulting in inaccurate focus information for the subject in the existing focus frame. In this embodiment of the present application, based on the displacement of the shooting object and/or the shooting device, the focus information corresponding to the shooting object can be compensated, so as to improve the focusing accuracy and the convenience of focusing operation.
以搭载在移动平台(如无人机或陆地机器人)上的拍摄装置为例,用户可以在移动平台或与移动平台通讯连接的遥控器上控制拍摄装置进行对焦操作。例如,遥控器的显示界面上可以设置有用于控制相机的多个虚拟按键,用户可以通过操作虚拟按键实现取景、激活对焦框、触发基于合焦信息的自动对焦或者拍摄图像等中至少一种功能。Taking a photographing device mounted on a mobile platform (such as a drone or a land robot) as an example, the user can control the photographing device on the mobile platform or a remote controller communicatively connected with the mobile platform to perform focusing operations. For example, the display interface of the remote controller can be provided with a plurality of virtual buttons for controlling the camera, and the user can realize at least one of the functions of framing, activating the focus frame, triggering autofocus based on in-focus information, or taking images by operating the virtual buttons. .
例如,图1中云台可以是手持云台或移动平台搭载的云台,云台上承载有拍摄装置,该拍摄装置可以具有焦距调节部件。For example, the pan-tilt shown in FIG. 1 may be a handheld pan-tilt or a pan-tilt mounted on a mobile platform, and the pan-tilt carries a photographing device, and the photographing device may have a focus adjustment component.
例如,手持云台可以包括支架和手柄等。其中,支架可以包括配套的电机和轴臂,电机用于驱动轴臂旋转,以驱动拍摄装置的运动。For example, a handheld pan/tilt may include a bracket, a handle, and the like. Wherein, the bracket may include a matching motor and a shaft arm, and the motor is used to drive the rotation of the shaft arm to drive the movement of the photographing device.
云台可以包括但不限于针对单轴或多轴的姿态可调结构,用于将拍摄装置固定在手持部上。例如,该云台允许拍摄装置相对于手持部发生位移,或者,沿着一个或多个轴转动。其中云台和手持部之间可以具有联动换算关系,如手持部发生的第一运动(如移动或转动)可以换算成云台发生的第二运动。反之亦然。The pan/tilt may include but is not limited to a single-axis or multi-axis attitude-adjustable structure for fixing the shooting device on the hand-held part. For example, the gimbal allows the camera to be displaced relative to the hand-held portion, or to rotate along one or more axes. There may be a linkage conversion relationship between the pan-tilt and the handheld part, for example, the first movement (such as movement or rotation) of the handheld part can be converted into the second movement of the pan-tilt. vice versa.
此外,云台上还可以包括传感系统。传感系统可以包括一个或者多个传感器,以感测空间方位、速度和/或加速度(如相对于多达三个自由度的旋转及平移)。一个或者多个传感器包括但不限于测距仪、GPS传感器、运动传感器、惯性测量单元或者影像传感器。传感系统提供的感测数据可以用于控制拍摄装置的位姿、速度和/或加速度等。In addition, a sensing system may also be included on the pan/tilt. The sensing system may include one or more sensors to sense spatial orientation, velocity, and/or acceleration (eg, rotation and translation with respect to up to three degrees of freedom). The one or more sensors include, but are not limited to, rangefinders, GPS sensors, motion sensors, inertial measurement units, or image sensors. The sensing data provided by the sensing system can be used to control the pose, speed and/or acceleration of the camera, etc.
云台上还可以包括通讯系统。通讯系统能够实现云台与具有通讯系统的控制终端通过有线或无线收发的信号进行通讯。通讯系统可以包括任何数量的用于无线通讯的发送器、接收器、和/或收发器。通讯可以是单向通讯或者双向通讯。以双向通讯为例,数据可以 在云台与拍摄装置之间在两个方向传输。例如,来自云台的控制数据可以控制其承载的拍摄装置或者其它影像捕获设备的操作(捕获静止或者运动的影像、变焦、开启或关闭、切换对焦模式、切换成像模式、改变影像分辨率、改变景深、改变曝光时间、改变可视角度或者视场)。A communication system may also be included on the cloud platform. The communication system can realize the communication between the pan-tilt and the control terminal with the communication system through wired or wireless signals sent and received. A communication system may include any number of transmitters, receivers, and/or transceivers for wireless communication. Communication can be one-way or two-way. Taking two-way communication as an example, data can be transmitted in two directions between the gimbal and the camera. For example, the control data from the pan/tilt can control the operation of the shooting device or other image capture equipment carried by it (capture still or moving images, zoom, turn on or off, switch focus mode, switch imaging mode, change image resolution, change depth of field, changing exposure time, changing viewing angle or field of view).
例如,拍摄装置可拆卸地承载在云台的承载座上,云台与拍摄装置通信连接,云台的手持部上设置显示屏,显示屏能够显示拍摄装置的拍摄画面。云台上可以设置有显示屏、拨杆、拨轮等部件以便于实现用户和云台之间的人机交互。其中,显示屏上可以显示人机交互界面。拨轮包括但不限于跟焦轮和/或变焦轮。For example, the photographing device is detachably carried on the bearing seat of the pan-tilt, and the pan-tilt is connected to the photographing device in communication. Parts such as a display screen, a lever, and a dial can be arranged on the cloud platform so as to realize human-computer interaction between the user and the cloud platform. Wherein, a human-computer interaction interface may be displayed on the display screen. The dial includes but is not limited to a focus wheel and/or a zoom wheel.
移动平台搭载拍摄装置的场景中,可移动平移还可以与控制终端相连,在某些实施例中,控制终端可以与云台或拍摄装置相连,控制终端可以向云台及拍摄装置中的一个或者多个提供控制指令,并且从云台及拍摄装置中的一个或者多个中接收信息(如承载体或者拍摄装置的位置和/或运动信息,拍摄装置感测的数据,如的影像数据)。在某些实施例中,控制终端的控制数据可以包括关于位置、运动、制动的指令,或者对云台和/或拍摄装置的控制。例如,控制数据可以导致云台位置和/或方向的改变。控制终端的控制数据可以控制拍摄装置或者其它影像捕获设备的操作(捕获静止或者运动的影像、变焦、开启或关闭、切换对焦模式、切换成像模式、改变影像分辨率、改变焦距、改变景深、改变曝光时间、改变可视角度或者视场)。在某些实施例中,对云台和/或拍摄装置的通讯可以包括一个或者多个传感器发出的信息。通讯信息可以包括从一个或者多个不同类型的传感器(如GPS传感器、运动传感器、惯性传感器、近程传感器或者影像传感器)传送的感应信息。例如,控制终端可以为移动平台的遥控器,也可以为诸如手机、iPad、可穿戴电子设备等能够用于控制云台的智能电子设备。控制终端可以远离云台,以实现对云台的远程控制,可以固定或可拆卸地设于云台上,具体可以根据需要进行设置。In the scene where the mobile platform is equipped with a shooting device, the movable translation can also be connected to the control terminal. Multiple provide control instructions, and receive information (such as the position and/or motion information of the carrier or the shooting device, data sensed by the shooting device, such as image data) from one or more of the pan/tilt and the shooting device. In some embodiments, the control data of the control terminal may include instructions about position, movement, and braking, or control over the pan/tilt and/or the shooting device. For example, control data may result in changes in the position and/or orientation of the gimbal. The control data of the control terminal can control the operation of the shooting device or other image capture equipment (capture still or moving images, zoom, turn on or off, switch focus mode, switch imaging mode, change image resolution, change focal length, change depth of field, change exposure time, changing viewing angle or field of view). In some embodiments, communications to the gimbal and/or camera may include information from one or more sensors. Communication information may include sensory information transmitted from one or more different types of sensors, such as GPS sensors, motion sensors, inertial sensors, proximity sensors, or image sensors. For example, the control terminal may be a remote controller of a mobile platform, or an intelligent electronic device such as a mobile phone, an iPad, or a wearable electronic device that can be used to control the pan/tilt. The control terminal can be far away from the pan-tilt to realize the remote control of the pan-tilt, and can be fixed or detachably installed on the pan-tilt, which can be set according to specific requirements.
在某些实施例中,移动平台可以与除了控制终端之外的其它远程设备,或者非控制终端的远程设备通讯。控制终端也可以与另外一个远程设备及云台进行通讯。例如,云台和/或控制终端可以与另一个移动平台或者另一个移动平台的承载体或拍摄装置通讯。当有需要的时候,另外的远程设备可以是第二终端或者其它计算设备(如计算机、桌上型电脑、平板电脑、智能手机、或者其它移动设备)。该远程设备可以向云台传送数据,从云台接收数据,传送数据给控制终端,和/或从控制终端接收数据。可选地,该远程设备可以连接到因特网或者其它电信网络,以使从云台和/或控制终端接收的数据上传到网站或者服务器上。In some embodiments, the mobile platform can communicate with remote devices other than the controlling terminal, or with remote devices other than the controlling terminal. The control terminal can also communicate with another remote device and PTZ. For example, the pan/tilt and/or the control terminal may communicate with another mobile platform or a carrier or a photographing device of another mobile platform. The additional remote device may be a second terminal or other computing device (such as a computer, desktop computer, tablet computer, smart phone, or other mobile device) when desired. The remote device can transmit data to the pan-tilt, receive data from the pan-tilt, transmit data to the control terminal, and/or receive data from the control terminal. Optionally, the remote device can be connected to the Internet or other telecommunication networks, so that the data received from the pan/tilt and/or the control terminal can be uploaded to a website or server.
图2为本申请实施例提供的拍摄装置的方框图。FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a photographing device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图2所示,拍摄装置100具有摄像部102以及镜头部200。例如,摄像部102包括图像传感器120、摄像控制部110以及存储器130。图像传感器120可以包括CCD或CMOS中至少一种。图像传感器120将经由多个透镜210成像的光学像的图像数据输出到摄像控制部110。摄像控制部110可以由CPU或MPU等微处理器、MCU等微控制器等构成。摄像控制部110可以根据来自用户的用户操作对拍摄装置100进行控制,该用户操作可以是针对镜头部200、摄像部102的显示屏或遥控器的操作。存储器130可以是计算机可读取的记录介质,可以包含SRAM、DRAM、EPROM、EEPROM以及USB存储器等的闪存中的至少一者。存储器130保存摄像控制部110对图像传感器120等进行控制所需的程序等。存储器130可以设置在拍摄装置100的壳体的内部。存储器130可以设置为能够从拍摄装置100的壳体拆下。As shown in FIG. 2 , the imaging device 100 has an imaging unit 102 and a lens unit 200 . For example, the imaging unit 102 includes an image sensor 120 , an imaging control unit 110 , and a memory 130 . The image sensor 120 may include at least one of CCD or CMOS. The image sensor 120 outputs the image data of the optical image formed through the plurality of lenses 210 to the imaging control unit 110 . The imaging control unit 110 may be constituted by a microprocessor such as a CPU or an MPU, a microcontroller such as an MCU, or the like. The imaging control unit 110 can control the imaging device 100 according to a user operation from a user, and the user operation can be an operation on the lens unit 200 , the display screen of the imaging unit 102 , or a remote controller. The memory 130 may be a computer-readable recording medium, and may include at least one of flash memories such as SRAM, DRAM, EPROM, EEPROM, and USB memory. The memory 130 stores programs and the like necessary for the imaging control unit 110 to control the image sensor 120 and the like. The memory 130 may be disposed inside the housing of the photographing device 100 . The memory 130 may be configured to be detachable from the casing of the photographing device 100 .
镜头部200可以包括多个透镜210、透镜移动机构212、以及镜头控制部220。多个透镜210可以包括变焦透镜、可变焦距透镜或跟焦透镜中至少一种。多个透镜210的至少部分被配置为能够沿着光轴移动。镜头部200可以是能够相对于摄像部102进行拆装的可更换镜头。透镜移动机构212使多个透镜210的至少部分沿着光轴移动。镜头控制部220按照来自摄像部102的镜头控制命令,驱动透镜移动机构212,使一个或多个透镜210沿着光轴方向移动。镜头控制命令包括但不限于:变焦控制命令或者跟焦控制命令中至少一种。The lens unit 200 may include a plurality of lenses 210 , a lens moving mechanism 212 , and a lens control unit 220 . The plurality of lenses 210 may include at least one of a zoom lens, a variable focal length lens, or a follow focus lens. At least part of the plurality of lenses 210 is configured to be movable along the optical axis. The lens unit 200 may be an interchangeable lens that can be attached or detached from the imaging unit 102 . The lens moving mechanism 212 moves at least part of the plurality of lenses 210 along the optical axis. The lens control unit 220 drives the lens moving mechanism 212 according to the lens control command from the imaging unit 102 to move one or more lenses 210 along the optical axis direction. The lens control command includes but not limited to: at least one of a zoom control command or a focus control command.
图3为本申请实施例提供的改变镜片间距离来调整焦距的示意图。FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of adjusting the focal length by changing the distance between lenses provided by the embodiment of the present application.
如图3所示,变焦镜头可以由多组透镜群(如L1、L2和L3)组成,本申请实施例可以通过电机输出力矩,转动变焦环或跟焦环,驱动透镜群运动,透镜群相对位置的改变将改变镜头整体的等效焦距。根据不同的镜头光学设计,移动的透镜群可能不同,透镜群移动的距离与焦距变化的关系可能不同,这时只需改变这个映射关系,本实施例同样适用。如图4中,通过移动中间的凹透镜L2来改变焦距f,焦距f和透镜L2的位置x可认为是线性关系,如式(1)所示。As shown in Figure 3, the zoom lens can be composed of multiple groups of lens groups (such as L1, L2 and L3). In the embodiment of the present application, the output torque of the motor can be used to rotate the zoom ring or the focus ring to drive the movement of the lens groups, and the lens groups are relatively A change in position will change the overall equivalent focal length of the lens. According to different lens optical designs, the moving lens group may be different, and the relationship between the moving distance of the lens group and the focal length change may be different. In this case, only the mapping relationship needs to be changed, and this embodiment is also applicable. As shown in Figure 4, the focal length f is changed by moving the concave lens L2 in the middle, and the focal length f and the position x of the lens L2 can be considered as a linear relationship, as shown in formula (1).
x=k1*f+b1   式(1)x=k1*f+b1 Formula (1)
其中,k1、b1是与机械结构、透镜群参数相关的待定常数。在通过外挂电机驱动变焦环或者跟焦环转动的场景中,电机通过齿轮啮合驱动变焦环转动或者驱动跟焦环转动。上述待定常数可以是通过标定和/或计算得到的。Among them, k1 and b1 are undetermined constants related to mechanical structure and lens group parameters. In the scene where the zoom ring or the follow focus ring is driven to rotate by an external motor, the motor drives the zoom ring to rotate or the follow focus ring to rotate through gear meshing. The above undetermined constants may be obtained through calibration and/or calculation.
图4为本申请实施例提供的镜头的示意图。FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a lens provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图4所示,镜头内部有螺纹,并且设置有变焦环、跟焦环,以调节镜头的透镜组的前后距离。镜头的对焦或跟焦可以是保持拍摄对象的位置和拍摄装置的相机本体的焦平面位置均不变。在跟焦的过程中,镜头内壁的螺纹将转动的旋转角度转换成镜头的透镜组的前后平移距离,相当于在拍摄装置与拍摄对象之间的实时距离保持不变的情况下,调整物距d和像距f(参考图6所示)使拍摄画面合焦。此外,镜头还可以包括用于调整光圈的光圈环。As shown in FIG. 4 , there are threads inside the lens, and a zoom ring and a focus ring are provided to adjust the front-rear distance of the lens group of the lens. The focus or follow-focus of the lens may be to keep the position of the subject and the position of the focal plane of the camera body of the shooting device unchanged. In the process of focusing, the thread on the inner wall of the lens converts the rotation angle into the forward and backward translation distance of the lens group of the lens, which is equivalent to adjusting the object distance when the real-time distance between the shooting device and the object remains unchanged. d and the image distance f (refer to Figure 6) to bring the shooting picture into focus. In addition, the lens can also include an aperture ring for adjusting the aperture.
上述拍摄装置100可以根据用户选取的模式执行:自动对焦、手动对焦或者手动辅助对焦等中至少一种,并且获得针对目标对象的清晰图像。The photographing device 100 may perform at least one of autofocus, manual focus, or manual assisted focus according to a mode selected by the user, and obtain a clear image of the target object.
关于手动对焦,可以包括如下所示的2种辅助方案。例如,通过相机内部的摄像控制部对采集的图像信息进行计算,将相邻像素反差比较大的点通过特殊颜色显示在取景器中,以提示用户当前的对焦范围,这种方式可以称为峰值对焦。例如,用户转动变焦环的时候取景器画面放大到显示屏与画面像素为指定比例(如1:1)放大模式,以便用户观察对焦是否清晰。Regarding manual focus, 2 assistance schemes as shown below can be included. For example, the camera control unit inside the camera calculates the collected image information, and displays the points with relatively large contrast between adjacent pixels in the viewfinder in a special color to remind the user of the current focus range. This method can be called peaking focus. For example, when the user rotates the zoom ring, the viewfinder screen is enlarged to a specified ratio (such as 1:1) between the display screen and the screen pixels, so that the user can observe whether the focus is clear.
以上两种方式都是为了帮助用户判断是否完成合焦的方法。但是两种方法在使用的效率和方便程度上都不足,还是全手动的对焦方式。如何提升手动对焦的速度和准确度,是亟待解决的问题。The above two methods are methods for helping the user to judge whether the focus is achieved. However, both methods are not efficient and convenient to use, and they are still fully manual focusing methods. How to improve the speed and accuracy of manual focusing is an urgent problem to be solved.
图5为本申请实施例提供的控制方法的流程示意图。FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图5所示,该控制方法可以包括操作S502~操作S506。As shown in FIG. 5 , the control method may include operation S502 to operation S506.
在操作S502,获取当前图像的对焦框(ROI)中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合。In operation S502, a set of in-focus information for at least one object in an in-focus frame (ROI) of a current image is acquired.
在本实施例中,当前图像可以是用户在使用拍摄装置进行取景时,在相机的显示屏上显示的图像。当相机处于手动辅助对焦模式时,相机的显示屏中显示对焦框(或者当用户半按快门键时在显示屏中显示对焦框),并且可以自动获取对焦框中包括的一个或多个对象的合焦信息。与对焦框对应的视场范围较小,囊括的对象数量有限,不会导致存在过多的合焦信息,进而降低用户难以从过多的合焦信息中确定与目标对象对应的合焦信息。对焦框在显示屏上的显示位置和大小可以由用户进行指定,或者由对焦框在显示屏上的显示位置和大小可以是预先设定的,如位于显示屏的中间位置。对焦框在显示屏上的位置可以随着拍摄对象的运动而改变。In this embodiment, the current image may be the image displayed on the display screen of the camera when the user uses the photographing device to view a view. When the camera is in the manual assisted focus mode, the focus frame is displayed on the display screen of the camera (or the focus frame is displayed on the display screen when the user presses the shutter button halfway), and the focus frame can be automatically obtained for one or more objects included in the focus frame. focus information. The field of view corresponding to the focus frame is small and includes a limited number of objects, which will not result in too much focus information, thereby reducing the difficulty for the user to determine the focus information corresponding to the target object from the excessive focus information. The display position and size of the focus frame on the display screen can be specified by the user, or the display position and size of the focus frame on the display screen can be preset, such as being located in the middle of the display screen. The position of the focus frame on the monitor can change as the subject moves.
合焦信息可以包括传感器采集的相机与对焦框中对象之间的距离信息,或者基于在不同焦距下采集的相邻图像像素之间反差强度来确定与该相邻像素对应的对象之间的距离信息。其中,该距离信息可以是物距,对于每个镜头,该物距存在对应的焦距。The in-focus information may include the distance information between the camera and the object in the focus frame collected by the sensor, or determine the distance between the objects corresponding to the adjacent pixels based on the contrast intensity between adjacent image pixels collected at different focal lengths information. Wherein, the distance information may be an object distance, and for each lens, the object distance has a corresponding focal length.
在某些实施例中,合焦信息集合包括与镜头相关联的参数和合焦强度。In some embodiments, the set of focus information includes parameters and focus strength associated with the lens.
其中,合焦强度可以通过合焦强度曲线等方式进行存储或显示。Wherein, the in-focus intensity can be stored or displayed by means of an in-focus intensity curve or the like.
在某些实施例中,与镜头相关联的参数包括镜头的焦距和对焦距离,其中对焦距离为拍摄对象与镜头之间的距离。In some embodiments, the parameters associated with the lens include a focal length and a focus distance of the lens, wherein the focus distance is the distance between the subject and the lens.
图6为本申请实施例提供的镜头的焦距和对焦距离的示意图。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the focal length and focusing distance of the lens provided by the embodiment of the present application.
如图6所示,照射到拍摄主体的光线被反射至镜头后,该光线经过折射等到达相机的传感器。其中,具有特定尺寸(如具有特定长度和宽度)的传感器和镜头,在某个特定的焦距f下具有对应的拍摄范围。其中,对焦距离也可以称为物距d,物距d是拍摄对象与镜头之间的距离。As shown in Figure 6, the light irradiated to the subject is reflected to the lens, and the light reaches the sensor of the camera after refraction and so on. Wherein, a sensor and a lens with a specific size (such as a specific length and width) have a corresponding shooting range at a specific focal length f. Wherein, the focusing distance may also be referred to as object distance d, which is the distance between the subject and the lens.
在某些实施例中,至少可以通过反差模式或者相位模式这两种方式获得合焦强度曲线,该合焦强度曲线是对焦框(ROI)内所有可合焦的物焦距离。In some embodiments, the in-focus intensity curve can be obtained in at least two ways, the contrast mode or the phase mode, and the in-focus intensity curve is all focusable object focal distances within the focus frame (ROI).
其中,关于反差模式,在手动辅助对焦模式下,计算当前焦距情况下对焦框内对象图像的反差强度,随着变焦环的旋转得到所经过焦距对应的反差强度值,得到反差强度曲线,作为合焦强度曲线。Among them, regarding the contrast mode, in the manual assisted focusing mode, the contrast intensity of the object image in the focus frame is calculated at the current focal length, and the contrast intensity value corresponding to the passed focal length is obtained with the rotation of the zoom ring, and the contrast intensity curve is obtained as a composite focal strength curve.
关于相位模式,在辅助对焦模式下,通过相机传感器(sensor)如距离传感器,集成的相位对焦信息,预先获得ROI内所有可合焦焦距,得到合焦强度曲线。Regarding the phase mode, in the auxiliary focus mode, through the phase focus information integrated by the camera sensor (sensor) such as a distance sensor, all focusable focal lengths in the ROI are obtained in advance, and the focus intensity curve is obtained.
图7为本申请实施例提供的对焦框、对象和合焦信息的示意图。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a focus frame, an object, and focus information provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图7所示,在显示器所显示的显示图像的中央位置,显示有对焦框。对焦框中显示有4个对象的图像,位于4个对象的中间位置的对象是目标对象。每个对象与相机之间的距离可以相同或不同。当每个对象与相机之间的距离不同时,则每个对象各自具有对应的不同合焦焦距:合焦焦距1~合焦焦距4。As shown in FIG. 7 , a focus frame is displayed at the central position of the display image displayed on the monitor. An image of 4 objects is displayed in the focus frame, and the object located in the middle of the 4 objects is the target object. The distance between each object and the camera can be the same or different. When the distance between each object and the camera is different, each object has a corresponding different in-focus focal length: in-focus focal length 1 to in-focus focal length 4 .
相关技术中,在进行自动对焦时,用户不便于准确地将镜头的焦距调整至合焦焦距3以得到针对目标对象的清晰图像:用户不便于介入目标焦距的选取,自动对焦完成后,如目标对象的图像不清晰,则重复执行自动对焦直至目标对象的图像清晰。如果尝试失败,则用户可能放弃拍摄或者使用手动对焦来将镜头的焦距调整至目标焦距。在进行手动对焦的过程中需要依赖于用户的对焦操作经验和视力水平等。In the related art, it is inconvenient for the user to accurately adjust the focal length of the lens to the in-focus focal length 3 to obtain a clear image of the target object during autofocus: it is inconvenient for the user to intervene in the selection of the target focal length. After the autofocus is completed, if the target If the image of the subject is not clear, autofocus is repeated until the image of the target object is clear. If the attempt fails, the user may abandon the shot or use manual focus to adjust the focus of the lens to the target focal length. In the process of manual focusing, it needs to rely on the user's focusing operation experience and vision level.
本申请实施例中,可以由相机自动确定对焦框中每个对象各自的合焦信息,如合焦焦距1~合焦焦距4。这些合焦焦距信息可以显示在显示屏上。此外,为了便于用户得知镜头的当前焦距,还可以在显示屏上显示当前焦距标志。用户可以便捷地通过选取合焦焦距的操作,将镜头的焦距自动变焦至合焦焦距3。In the embodiment of the present application, the camera may automatically determine the focus information of each object in the focus frame, such as focus focal length 1 to focus focal length 4 . The in-focus focal length information can be displayed on the display screen. In addition, in order to facilitate the user to know the current focal length of the lens, a sign of the current focal length can also be displayed on the display screen. The user can conveniently select the focal length of the focal point to automatically zoom the focal length of the lens to the focal length of the focal point 3.
参考图7所示,当前图像的对焦框中可以包括多个对象,例如,目标对象只是该多个对象中的一个,摄像控制部可计算该多个对象中每个对象在合焦时的对焦焦距。其中,每个对象在合焦时的合焦焦距可以不同,也可以部分相同,也就是说,每个对象可以对应一个不同的合焦焦距,或者,该多个对象中的部分对象对应同一个合焦焦距。As shown in FIG. 7 , multiple objects may be included in the focus frame of the current image. For example, the target object is only one of the multiple objects, and the camera control unit may calculate the focus of each object in the multiple objects when they are in focus. focal length. Wherein, the in-focus focal length of each object can be different or partly the same when in focus, that is to say, each object can correspond to a different in-focus focal length, or some objects in the plurality of objects correspond to the same In-focus focal length.
在某些实施例中,拍摄装置包括显示屏,显示屏用于显示合焦信息集合中至少一个合焦信息,合焦信息包括合焦强度峰值。In some embodiments, the shooting device includes a display screen for displaying at least one focus information in the focus information set, and the focus information includes a focus intensity peak value.
当摄像控制部计算出对象在合焦时的合焦焦距后,显示组件可以显示合焦焦距指示标志,合焦焦距指示标志用于指示合焦焦距,此处只是示意性说明,并不限定合焦焦距指示标志的具体形状。需要说明的是,该合焦焦距也可以不用在显示屏上进行显示。After the camera control unit calculates the in-focus focal length of the object when it is in focus, the display component can display the in-focus focal length indicator, which is used to indicate the in-focus focal length, which is only a schematic illustration here, and does not limit the in-focus The specific shape of the focal length indicator. It should be noted that the focus focal length may not be displayed on the display screen.
显示组件可以显示多个合焦焦距指示标志,多个合焦焦距指示标志用于指示多个对象分别对应的合焦焦距。显示组件还可以显示当前焦距标志,当前焦距标志用于指示当前焦距。需要说明的是,该当前焦距也可以不用在显示屏上进行显示。The display component can display multiple in-focus focal length indicator marks, and the multiple in-focus focal length indicator marks are used to indicate the in-focus focal lengths corresponding to the multiple objects. The display component can also display a current focal length mark, which is used to indicate the current focal length. It should be noted that the current focal length may not be displayed on the display screen.
如图7所示,当摄像控制部计算出多个对象中每个对象在合焦时的对焦焦距后,控制显示屏显示多个合焦焦距指示标志,该多个合焦焦距指示标志具体可以是如图7所示的合焦焦距指示标志71、合焦焦距指示标志72、合焦焦距指示标志73、合焦焦距指示标志74;合焦焦距指示标志71、合焦焦距指示标志72、合焦焦距指示标志73或合焦焦距指示标志74用于指示该多个对象中至少一个对象在合焦时的对焦焦距。另外,该摄像控制部还可以控制显示屏显示当前焦距标志70,当前焦距标志70用于指示对焦调节组件21当前的调整位置对应的当前对焦值。当前焦距标志70和某一个合焦焦距指示标志例如合焦焦距指示标志71之间的指示焦距差,与当前对焦值和合焦焦距指示标志71指示的对焦焦距之间的差值相关。As shown in Figure 7, after the camera control unit calculates the focus focal length of each object in the plurality of objects when in focus, the control display screen displays a plurality of in-focus focal length indicator marks, and the multiple in-focus focal length indicator marks can specifically be In-focus focal length indicator 71, in-focus focal length indicator 72, in-focus focal length indicator 73, in-focus focal length indicator 74 as shown in Figure 7; in-focus focal length indicator 71, in-focus focal length indicator 72, in-focus focus The in-focus indicator mark 73 or the in-focus indicator mark 74 is used to indicate the in-focus focal length of at least one object among the plurality of objects when in focus. In addition, the camera control unit can also control the display screen to display a current focal length mark 70 , and the current focal length mark 70 is used to indicate the current focus value corresponding to the current adjustment position of the focus adjustment assembly 21 . The focal length difference indicated between the current focal length mark 70 and a certain in-focus focal length indicator mark, such as the in-focus focal length indicator mark 71 , is related to the difference between the current focus value and the in-focus focal length indicated by the in-focus focal length indicator mark 71 .
图7中,在当前时刻,变焦环的调整位置在位置A,当前焦距小于与目标对象对应的焦距(合焦焦距3),当前焦距标志70位于合焦焦距指示标志73的左侧,并且当前焦距标志70和合焦焦距指示标志73之间的指示焦距差越大,当前对焦值和合焦焦距指示标志73指示的对焦焦距之间的差值越大。In Fig. 7, at the current moment, the adjustment position of the zoom ring is at position A, the current focal length is smaller than the focal length corresponding to the target object (in-focus focal length 3), the current focal length mark 70 is located on the left side of the in-focus focal length indicator mark 73, and the current The larger the indicated focal distance difference between the focal length mark 70 and the in-focus focal length indicator mark 73 is, the greater the difference between the current focus value and the in-focus focal length indicated by the in-focus focal length indicator mark 73 is.
在一些实施例中,上述方法在获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合之后,还可以包括如下操作:通过传感器更新对焦框的合焦信息。对于基于传感器获取的对象和拍摄装置之间距离的场景中,传感器可以实时地更新两者之间的距离,进而更新合焦信息集合。这样有助于改善因对象和拍摄装置之间位置关系改变导致的合焦信息不准确的问题。In some embodiments, after acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image, the above method may further include the following operation: updating the focus information of the focus frame by a sensor. For the scene based on the distance between the object and the shooting device obtained by the sensor, the sensor can update the distance between the two in real time, and then update the focus information set. This helps to improve the problem of inaccurate focus information caused by changes in the positional relationship between the object and the photographing device.
在操作S504,获得第一操作,其中,第一操作包括变焦操作或者第一操作是针对合焦信息集合中的合焦信息。In operation S504, a first operation is obtained, wherein the first operation includes a zoom operation or the first operation is for in-focus information in the in-focus information set.
在本实施例中,可以通过第一操作触发变焦过程。In this embodiment, the zooming process may be triggered by a first operation.
以相机为例,相机的镜头具有变焦环,在用户转动变焦环的时候,即可触发变焦过程。例如,相机上具有用于变焦的按键,如增大焦距的按键和减小焦距的按键,在用户按压其中某个按键的时候,即可触发变焦过程。例如,相机的显示屏上显示有变焦组件,在用户操作该调焦组件的时候,即可触发变焦过程。例如,相机的显示屏上显示有合焦强度曲线,在用户从合焦强度曲线中选取某个合焦焦距时,则可触发变焦过程。Taking a camera as an example, the lens of the camera has a zoom ring, and when the user turns the zoom ring, the zooming process can be triggered. For example, the camera has buttons for zooming, such as a button for increasing the focal length and a button for reducing the focal length. When the user presses one of the buttons, the zooming process can be triggered. For example, a zooming component is displayed on the display screen of the camera, and the zooming process can be triggered when the user operates the focusing component. For example, a focus intensity curve is displayed on the display screen of the camera, and when the user selects a certain focus focal length from the focus intensity curve, the zooming process can be triggered.
以相机云台为例,例如,承载相机的云台上具有用于变焦的按键,如增大焦距的按键和减小焦距的按键,在用户按压其中某个按键的时候,即可触发变焦过程。例如,云台的显示屏上显示有调焦组件,在用户操作该调焦组件的时候,即可触发变焦过程。例如,云台的显示屏上显示有合焦强度曲线,在用户从合焦强度曲线中选取某个合焦焦距时,则可触发变焦过程。Take the camera gimbal as an example. For example, the gimbal carrying the camera has buttons for zooming, such as a button to increase the focal length and a button to decrease the focal length. When the user presses one of the buttons, the zooming process can be triggered . For example, a focusing component is displayed on the display screen of the pan/tilt, and the zooming process can be triggered when the user operates the focusing component. For example, a focus intensity curve is displayed on the display screen of the gimbal, and when the user selects a certain focus focal length from the focus intensity curve, the zooming process can be triggered.
以具有遥控器的移动平台为例,例如,遥控器上具有用于变焦的按键,如增大焦距的按键和减小焦距的按键,在用户按压其中某个按键的时候,即可触发搭载在移动平台上的相机的变焦过程。例如,遥控器的显示屏上显示有调焦组件,在用户操作该调焦组件的时候,即可触发变焦过程。例如,遥控器的显示屏上显示有合焦强度曲线,在用户从合焦强度曲线中选取某个合焦焦距时,则可触发变焦过程。例如,用户可以通过拨杆或拨轮等输入第一用户操作。Take a mobile platform with a remote control as an example. For example, the remote control has buttons for zooming, such as a button for increasing the focal length and a button for reducing the focal length. When the user presses one of the buttons, it can trigger the The zoom process of the camera on the mobile platform. For example, a focusing component is displayed on the display screen of the remote controller, and the zooming process can be triggered when the user operates the focusing component. For example, a focus intensity curve is displayed on the display screen of the remote controller, and when the user selects a certain focus focal length from the focus intensity curve, the zooming process can be triggered. For example, the user may input the first user operation through a lever or a dial or the like.
在某些实施例中,获得第一操作是用户转动了变焦环或者点击了用户进行变焦的按键等。例如,如果合焦信息集合中包括至少一个合焦信息,响应于变焦环发生转动,获得自动变焦操作。具体地,获得第一操作包括以下至少一种。例如,如果合焦信息集合中包括至少一个合焦信息,响应于变焦环的转动速度大于或等于预设转动速度阈值,获得自动变焦操作。例如,如果合焦信息集合中包括至少一个合焦信息,响应于变焦环的转动持续时长大于或等于预设时长阈值,获得自动变焦操作。例如,如果合焦信息集合中包括至少一个合焦信息,响应于变焦环的转动速度大于或等于预设转动速度阈值,并且变焦环的转动持续时长大于或等于预设时长阈值,获得自动变焦操作。其中,预设转动速度阈值、预设时长阈值可以根据经验或通过实验进行标定。In some embodiments, the obtaining of the first operation is that the user rotates the zoom ring or clicks a button for zooming by the user, or the like. For example, if at least one piece of focus information is included in the focus information set, an automatic zoom operation is obtained in response to the rotation of the zoom ring. Specifically, obtaining the first operation includes at least one of the following. For example, if the set of focus information includes at least one piece of focus information, in response to the rotation speed of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset rotation speed threshold, an automatic zoom operation is obtained. For example, if the set of focus information includes at least one piece of focus information, in response to the duration of rotation of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset duration threshold, an automatic zoom operation is obtained. For example, if the focus information set includes at least one focus information, in response to the rotation speed of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset rotation speed threshold, and the duration of rotation of the zoom ring is greater than or equal to a preset duration threshold, an automatic zoom operation is obtained . Wherein, the preset rotation speed threshold and the preset duration threshold can be calibrated according to experience or through experiments.
在操作S506,响应于第一操作,控制拍摄装置的镜头基于合焦信息集合自动对焦。In operation S506, in response to the first operation, the lens of the photographing device is controlled to automatically focus based on the focus information set.
在本实施例中,可以基于已确定的合焦信息进行自动对焦,无需用户再手动通过调节 变焦环等方式进行手动变焦,不但有助于提升变焦速度,还有助于提升变焦准确度,降低了手动变焦对用户操作经验和视力水平的依赖。In this embodiment, automatic focusing can be performed based on the determined focus information, without the need for the user to manually adjust the zoom ring to perform manual zooming, which not only helps to increase the zooming speed, but also helps to improve the zooming accuracy and reduce the Eliminates the dependence of manual zoom on the user's operating experience and vision level.
例如,在基于合焦信息进行自动变焦的过程中,由于对焦框中可能存在多个对象,各对象对应的合焦焦距可能不同,用户可以通过逐步变焦的方式将相机的焦距调整至目标焦距。例如,基于合焦信息集合中各合焦信息依次逼近目标焦距。例如,基于合焦信息集合中各合焦信息和用户输入的焦距改变量来分段逼近目标焦距。For example, in the process of auto-zooming based on the focus information, since there may be multiple objects in the focus frame, the focal lengths corresponding to each object may be different, and the user can adjust the focal length of the camera to the target focal length by gradually zooming. For example, the target focal length is sequentially approached based on each focus information in the focus information set. For example, the target focal length is approached in segments based on each focus information in the focus information set and the focal length change amount input by the user.
例如,在基于合焦信息进行自动变焦的过程中,当对焦框中存在多个合焦信息时,用户可以直接从中选取合焦信息的方式提升变焦速度。如用户可以通过直接选取合焦焦距的方式实现一步变焦。For example, in the process of auto-zooming based on the focus information, when there are multiple focus information in the focus frame, the user can directly select the focus information to increase the zooming speed. For example, the user can realize one-step zooming by directly selecting the focal length of the focus.
在某些实施例中,镜头可以包括变焦环。相应地,第一操作包括按照特定方向转动变焦环。In some embodiments, the lens may include a zoom ring. Accordingly, the first operation includes turning the zoom ring in a specific direction.
上述响应于第一操作,控制拍摄装置的镜头基于合焦信息集合自动对焦可以包括如下操作:重复以下操作直至将镜头的焦距改变为与目标对象对应的合焦焦距:响应于第一操作,控制镜头的焦距改变为合焦信息集合中目标焦距,目标焦距是以镜头的当前焦距为起始焦距,基于变焦环的转动方向信息在合焦信息集合中进行匹配确定的焦距。In response to the first operation, controlling the lens of the camera to automatically focus based on the focus information set may include the following operations: repeating the following operations until the focal length of the lens is changed to a focal length corresponding to the target object: in response to the first operation, controlling The focal length of the lens is changed to the target focal length in the focus information set. The target focal length is the focal length that is determined based on the current focal length of the lens and matched in the focus information set based on the rotation direction information of the zoom ring.
其中,目标焦距可以包括以下任意一种:合焦信息集合中与镜头的当前焦距的差值最小的焦距、合焦信息集合中与镜头的当前焦距的差值最大的焦距。本实施例中,焦距先调整至最近或最远合焦焦距,再重复执行变焦过程,以一步步实现到目标合焦点。Wherein, the target focal length may include any one of the following: the focal length in the focus information set with the smallest difference with the current focal length of the lens, and the focal length in the focus information set with the largest difference with the current focal length of the lens. In this embodiment, the focal length is first adjusted to the closest or farthest focal length, and then the zooming process is repeated to achieve the target focal point step by step.
在某些实施例中,对焦框内锁定的对象可能存在多个峰值情况(前后景),用户可以通过手动辅助对焦方式在不同峰值间进行快速选择对焦。手动辅助对焦的效果类似于粘滞效果:如当移动一个对象至另一个对象的过程中,在满足一定条件下,另一个对象会自动将该一个对象吸引过去,而无需用户一直将该一个对象移动至该另一个对象,提升操作便捷度。In some embodiments, there may be multiple peaks (foreground and foreground) for the locked object in the focus frame, and the user can quickly select and focus among different peaks through manual assisted focusing. The effect of manual assisted focusing is similar to the sticky effect: for example, when moving an object to another object, if certain conditions are met, another object will automatically attract the object to the past, without the need for the user to keep the object Move to this other object to improve the convenience of operation.
图8为本申请实施例提供的基于变焦环进行手动辅助对焦的过程示意图。FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a manual assisted focusing process based on a zoom ring provided in an embodiment of the present application.
如图8所示,对焦框中对象存在4个合焦焦距:合焦焦距1~合焦焦距4。当前焦距位于合焦焦距1和合焦焦距2之间,即相机在当前焦距下没有处于合焦状态。用户通过转动变焦环以增大相机的焦距,则相机可以以当前焦距为起点,以合焦焦距2为目标焦距进行自动变焦。期间,用户无需通过精准的变焦操作将相机的焦距调整至合焦焦距2,变焦过程是自动执行的,其速度快于手动变焦至合焦焦距2的速度。在变焦至合焦焦距2之后,相机中止变焦,并在显示屏显示在合焦焦距2下拍摄的图像。以上完成一次第一操作触发 的自动变焦过程。As shown in FIG. 8 , there are four in-focus focal lengths for objects in the focus frame: in-focus focal length 1 to in-focus focal length 4 . The current focal length is between in-focus focal length 1 and in-focus focal length 2, that is, the camera is not in focus at the current focal length. The user increases the focal length of the camera by turning the zoom ring, and the camera can automatically zoom with the current focal length as the starting point and the focus focal length 2 as the target focal length. During this period, the user does not need to adjust the focal length of the camera to the focal length 2 through precise zooming operations. The zooming process is performed automatically, and its speed is faster than manual zooming to the focal length 2. After zooming to focal length 2, the camera stops zooming and displays the image captured at focal length 2 on the monitor. The automatic zooming process triggered by the first operation is completed once above.
用户在显示屏上查看图像后,如果目标对象的图像还不够清晰,则表明合焦焦距2不是与目标对象对应的合焦焦距。用户可以通过转动变焦环以增大相机的焦距,则相机可以以合焦焦距2为起点,以合焦焦距3为目标焦距进行自动变焦。期间,用户无需通过精准的变焦操作将相机的焦距调整至合焦焦距3,变焦过程是自动执行的,其速度快于手动变焦至合焦焦距3的速度。在变焦至合焦焦距3之后,相机中止变焦,并在显示屏显示在合焦焦距3下拍摄的图像。以上完成两次第一操作触发的自动变焦过程。用户在显示屏上查看在合焦焦距3下拍摄的图像后,如果目标对象的图像已清晰,则用户可以进行拍摄操作。After the user checks the image on the display screen, if the image of the target object is not clear enough, it indicates that the in-focus focal length 2 is not the in-focus focal length corresponding to the target object. The user can increase the focal length of the camera by turning the zoom ring, and the camera can automatically zoom with the focal length 2 as the starting point and the focal length 3 as the target focal length. During this period, the user does not need to adjust the focal length of the camera to the focal length 3 through precise zooming operations. The zooming process is performed automatically, and its speed is faster than manual zooming to the focal length 3. After zooming to focal length 3, the camera stops zooming and displays the image captured at focal length 3 on the monitor. The automatic zoom process triggered by the first operation twice is completed above. After the user checks the image captured at the in-focus focal length 3 on the display screen, if the image of the target object is clear, the user can perform the shooting operation.
需要说明的是,为了便于用户得知当前焦距以及当前是否处于合焦状态,可以对用户进行对焦提示。在本实施例中,对焦提示的方式有多种,例如以视觉形式、听觉形式、机械形式等进行对焦提示。It should be noted that, in order to facilitate the user to know the current focal length and whether the focus is currently in focus, a focus prompt may be given to the user. In this embodiment, there are multiple ways of focusing prompts, for example, focusing prompts in visual form, auditory form, mechanical form, and the like.
以视觉形式的对焦提示为例,对焦提示可直观地显示在显示组件上。例如,提示信息可以显示在拍摄设备的取景器或屏幕、或者远程控制器的屏幕上。当对焦提示显示在屏幕上时,拍摄设备拍摄的图像可以和对焦提示同时显示在屏幕上,对焦提示可以覆盖或叠加在屏幕显示的图像上。当用户操作变焦环以改变拍摄设备的焦距时,用户可以同时看到图像和对焦提示以确定图像是否合焦。Taking the focus prompt in a visual form as an example, the focus prompt may be visually displayed on the display component. For example, the prompt information can be displayed on the viewfinder or screen of the shooting device, or the screen of the remote controller. When the focus prompt is displayed on the screen, the image captured by the shooting device and the focus prompt can be displayed on the screen simultaneously, and the focus prompt can be covered or superimposed on the image displayed on the screen. When the user operates the zoom ring to change the focal length of the shooting device, the user can simultaneously see the image and focus prompts to determine whether the image is in focus.
参考图8所示,显示组件显示包括合焦焦距标志、当前焦距标志、当前焦距标志(合焦)等。此外,显示组件显示还可以包括目标焦距标志等。当前焦距标志、当前焦距标志(合焦)可以以不同的形状进行表示,例如,当前焦距标志以三角形进行表示,当前焦距标志(合焦)以五角星、圆形、圆点等不同于当前焦距标志的标志进行表示。Referring to FIG. 8 , the display component displays include an in-focus focal length mark, a current focus distance mark, a current focus distance mark (in-focus) and the like. In addition, the display component display may also include a target focal length mark and the like. The current focus mark and the current focus mark (focus) can be represented in different shapes, for example, the current focus mark is represented by a triangle, and the current focus mark (focus) is different from the current focus by a five-pointed star, circle, dot, etc. The flags of the flags are indicated.
当前焦距标志、当前焦距标志(合焦)也可以以相同的形状和不同的状态(如填充状态、颜色、大小等)进行表示。例如,当前焦距标志(合焦)的尺寸大于当前焦距标志,当前焦距标志(合焦)具有填充,当前焦距标志是黄色而当前焦距标志(合焦)是绿色等。The current focal length mark and the current focal length mark (in-focus) can also be represented by the same shape and different states (such as filling state, color, size, etc.). For example, the size of the current focus mark (in focus) is larger than the current focus mark, the current focus mark (in focus) has a fill, the current focus mark (in focus) is yellow and the current focus mark (in focus) is green, etc.
在某些实施例中,上述方法在获得第一操作的过程中或者之后,获得变焦环的转动量还可以包括如下操作。首先,基于镜头的当前焦距和变焦环的转动量确定辅助焦距。然后,基于辅助焦距从合焦信息集合中确定目标焦距,其中,目标焦距是以辅助焦距为起始焦距,按照变焦环的转动方向信息在合焦信息集合中进行匹配,确定的与起始焦距最接近的焦距。In some embodiments, during or after obtaining the first operation in the above method, obtaining the rotation amount of the zoom ring may further include the following operations. First, the auxiliary focal length is determined based on the current focal length of the lens and the rotation amount of the zoom ring. Then, based on the auxiliary focal length, the target focal length is determined from the focus information set, wherein the target focal length is based on the auxiliary focal length as the initial focal length, and is matched in the focus information set according to the rotation direction information of the zoom ring, and the determined and initial focal length The closest focal length.
图9为本申请另一实施例提供的基于变焦环进行手动辅助对焦的过程示意图。FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a process of manually assisting focusing based on a zoom ring according to another embodiment of the present application.
如图9所示,对焦框中对象存在4个合焦焦距:合焦焦距1~合焦焦距4。当前焦距位 于合焦焦距1和合焦焦距2之间,即相机在当前焦距下没有处于合焦状态。用户通过转动变焦环以增大相机的焦距。与图8中实施例所不同的是,本实施例中还获取了用户转动变焦环产生的转动量。用户在预览图形中可以看到目标对象的图像的模糊程度,如果模糊程度越高。为了使得目标对象的图像清晰,则需要调整的焦距越大。这样使得用户可以根据目标对象的图像模糊程度确定一个大致的变焦范围,如从当前焦距调整至目标对象的图像清晰,则至少需要转动变焦环1/4圈或3/1圈或更多。为了避免当前焦距和目标焦距之间存在过多合焦焦距(如合焦焦距2),导致当采用图8所示的变焦过程需要用户多次进行第一操作,则相机可以以当前焦距为起点,基于变焦环的转动量确定一个辅助焦距(参考图9的中间状态的虚线三角标志所示),然后,再根据变焦环的转动方向来确定本次自动变焦的目标焦距(如合焦焦距3),并进行自动变焦。期间,用户无需通过精准的变焦操作将相机的焦距调整至合焦焦距2和合焦焦距3,变焦过程是自动执行的,其速度快于手动变焦至合焦焦距2和合焦焦距3的速度。此外,参考图9所示,因无需自动变焦至合焦焦距2,减少了一次自动对焦步骤,进一步提升了变焦速度。As shown in FIG. 9 , there are four in-focus focal lengths for objects in the focus frame: in-focus focal length 1 to in-focus focal length 4 . The current focal length is between in-focus focal length 1 and in-focus focal length 2, that is, the camera is not in focus at the current focal length. The user increases the focal length of the camera by turning the zoom ring. The difference from the embodiment in FIG. 8 is that in this embodiment, the amount of rotation generated by the user's rotation of the zoom ring is also acquired. The user can see the blurring degree of the image of the target object in the preview graphics, if the blurring degree is higher. In order to make the image of the target object clear, the larger the focal length needs to be adjusted. In this way, the user can determine a rough zoom range according to the image blur of the target object. If the image of the target object is adjusted from the current focal length to be clear, the zoom ring needs to be rotated at least 1/4 circle or 3/1 circle or more. In order to avoid too many in-focus focal lengths (such as in-focus focal length 2) between the current focal length and the target focal length, resulting in the need for the user to perform the first operation multiple times when using the zoom process shown in Figure 8, the camera can use the current focal length as the starting point , determine an auxiliary focal length based on the amount of rotation of the zoom ring (refer to the dotted triangle mark in the middle state of Fig. ), and zoom automatically. During this period, the user does not need to adjust the focal length of the camera to focus on focal length 2 and focus on focal length 3 through precise zoom operations. The zoom process is automatically performed, and its speed is faster than manual zooming to focus on focal length 2 and focus on focal length 3. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9 , since there is no need to automatically zoom to the focus focal length 2, one autofocus step is reduced, and the zoom speed is further improved.
图9所示的实施例中同样可以具有对焦提示信息,可以参考如上所示的对焦提示信息相关部分内容。The embodiment shown in FIG. 9 may also have focus prompt information, and reference may be made to the content related to the above focus prompt information.
此外,合焦焦距指示标志和当前焦距标志之间的指示焦距差随着变焦环的调整位置的变化而均匀变化。变焦环的转动角度也可称为变焦环的调整量,合焦焦距指示标志和当前焦距标志之间的指示焦距差随着变焦环的调整量而均匀变化。例如,变焦环环绕光学组件,变焦环的调整量具体可以是该变焦环的转动角度,该变焦环的转动角度是指该变焦环在转动时其角度的变化量。该变焦环在转动时,合焦焦距指示标志和当前焦距标志之间的指示焦距差随着变化。该指示焦距差的变化量与该变焦环的转动角度成正比,即合焦焦距指示标志和当前焦距标志之间的指示焦距差随着变焦环的转动角度均匀变化。In addition, the indicated focal length difference between the in-focus focal length indicator mark and the current focal length mark changes uniformly as the adjustment position of the zoom ring changes. The rotation angle of the zoom ring can also be referred to as the adjustment amount of the zoom ring, and the indicated focal length difference between the in-focus focal length indicator mark and the current focal length mark changes uniformly with the adjustment amount of the zoom ring. For example, the zoom ring surrounds the optical assembly, and the adjustment amount of the zoom ring may specifically be the rotation angle of the zoom ring, and the rotation angle of the zoom ring refers to the change amount of the angle of the zoom ring when it is rotated. When the zoom ring is turned, the indicated focal length difference between the in-focus focal length indicator mark and the current focal length mark changes accordingly. The variation of the indicated focal length difference is directly proportional to the rotation angle of the zoom ring, that is, the indicated focal length difference between the in-focus focal length indicator mark and the current focal length indicator changes uniformly with the rotation angle of the zoom ring.
在某些实施例中,合焦强度峰值可以以数值、曲线图或者线段等方式进行显示。In some embodiments, the peak value of the in-focus intensity can be displayed in numerical values, graphs, or line segments.
在某些实施例中,显示屏还用于显示与合焦信息集合对应的输入组件。该输入组件可以响应于用户操作进行信息输入,如通过输入组件输入用户选择的合焦信息等。In some embodiments, the display screen is also used to display input components corresponding to the in-focus information set. The input component can perform information input in response to user operations, such as inputting focus information selected by the user through the input component.
例如,响应于第一操作,控制拍摄装置的镜头基于合焦信息集合自动对焦可以包括:响应于针对输入组件的用户操作,从合焦信息集合中确定与目标对象对应的目标对象焦距。For example, in response to the first operation, controlling the lens of the photographing device to automatically focus based on the focus information set may include: in response to a user operation on the input component, determining the focal length of the target object corresponding to the target object from the focus information set.
在某些实施例中,上述方法还可以包括如下至少一种操作。例如,显示当前焦距标志,当前焦距标志对应于合焦强度曲线中一个点。例如,显示合焦提示信息,合焦提示信息包括当前焦距标志的显示状态改变信息。In some embodiments, the above method may further include at least one of the following operations. For example, a current focus indicator is displayed, which corresponds to a point in the in-focus intensity curve. For example, in-focus prompt information is displayed, and the in-focus prompt information includes display state change information of the current focus distance mark.
图10为本申请实施例提供的基于合焦信息进行手动辅助对焦的过程示意图。FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a process of manually assisting focusing based on focus information provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图10所示,是相机的显示屏显示的取景图像,用户在进行手动辅助对焦进行对焦时,显示屏还显示出对焦框(虚线所示的方框)。对焦框内的图像中包括头部图像(目标对象)和树叶图像(非目标对象)。由于对焦框中各对象与拍摄装置之间的距离不同,各对象的合焦焦距也不同。为了便于用于快速地选取与目标对象对应的合焦焦距,显示屏中还可以显示有合焦信息和对焦提示信息等。As shown in FIG. 10 , it is a framing image displayed on the display screen of the camera. When the user performs manual assisted focusing to focus, the display screen also displays a focus frame (the frame shown by the dotted line). The image within the focus frame includes head image (target object) and leaf image (non-target object). Since the distance between each object in the focusing frame and the shooting device is different, the focal length of each object is also different. In order to facilitate the user to quickly select the in-focus focal length corresponding to the target object, in-focus information, in-focus prompt information, and the like may also be displayed on the display screen.
参考图10所示,对焦框的左侧还显示了条状的合焦焦距,其中,条状中每个刻度可以表示一个合焦焦距。此外,为了便于用户得知当前焦距,还可以在对应于条状的合焦焦距的位置处显示焦距标志,如图10中无填充的三角形所示。用户需要选取合焦信息时,则可以点击条状的合焦焦距中某个刻度即可。如果在该刻度对应的焦距下采集的目标对象的图像不够清晰,则用户可以通过点击另一个刻度进行变焦,以获取变焦后的目标对象的图像,重复上述操作直至目标对象的图像清晰。需要说明的是,图10中所示的条状的合焦焦距仅为示例性示出,还可以以有刻度的箭头线条、有刻度的线段、有刻度的圆形等进行显示。Referring to FIG. 10 , the left side of the focus frame also displays the in-focus focal length in a bar, wherein each scale in the bar can represent a in-focus focal length. In addition, in order to facilitate the user to know the current focal length, a focal length mark may also be displayed at a position corresponding to the in-focus focal length of the bar, as shown by an unfilled triangle in FIG. 10 . When the user needs to select the in-focus information, he can click on a scale in the bar-shaped in-focus focal length. If the image of the target object collected at the focal length corresponding to the scale is not clear enough, the user can click on another scale to zoom to obtain the zoomed image of the target object, and repeat the above operations until the image of the target object is clear. It should be noted that the bar-shaped in-focus focal lengths shown in FIG. 10 are only exemplary, and may also be displayed as arrow lines with scales, line segments with scales, circles with scales, and the like.
图10中还示出了合焦提示信息,如图10中有填充的三角形,这样有助于提升用户当前已处于合焦状态。例如,在当前焦距等于合焦信息中合焦焦距时,显示合焦提示信息。合焦提示信息可以是通过当前焦距标识的状态改变来进行提示,如对当前焦距标识进行填充、改变颜色或改变大小等。FIG. 10 also shows focus prompt information, such as a filled triangle in FIG. 10 , which helps to improve the user's current focus state. For example, when the current focal length is equal to the in-focus focal length in the in-focus information, in-focus prompt information is displayed. The in-focus prompt information may be prompted by a state change of the current focus distance mark, such as filling, changing color or changing size of the current focus distance mark.
参考图10所示,还可以获取用户对多个合焦焦距指示标志中任一个合焦焦距指示标志的选择操作。例如,获取用户对多个合焦焦距指示标志中任一个合焦焦距指示标志的点击操作。参考图10所示,用户在显示屏上对合焦焦距指示标志进行点击,该显示屏可以是触摸屏,该触摸屏可感测到用户对合焦焦距指示标志的点击操作,并将该点击操作发送给摄像控制部。Referring to FIG. 10 , it is also possible to acquire the user's selection operation on any in-focus focal length indicator mark among the plurality of in-focus focal length indicator marks. For example, a user's click operation on any in-focus focal length indicator mark among the plurality of in-focus focal length indicator marks is acquired. Referring to Fig. 10, the user clicks on the in-focus focal length indicator mark on the display screen, the display screen may be a touch screen, and the touch screen can sense the user's click operation on the in-focus focal length indicator mark, and send the click operation to to Camera Control.
本实施例通过显示用于指示合焦焦距的合焦焦距标志,以及显示用于指示当前焦距的当前焦距标志,当合焦焦距标志和当前焦距标志不重合或者当前焦距标志不是合焦状态时,提示用户调整拍摄装置的焦距以实现合焦,使得用户在手动对焦时,快速准确地找到对象合焦时的焦距。In this embodiment, by displaying the in-focus focal length mark for indicating the in-focus focal length, and displaying the current focal length mark for indicating the current focal length, when the in-focus focal length mark and the current focal length mark do not overlap or the current focus distance mark is not in focus, Prompt the user to adjust the focal length of the shooting device to achieve focus, so that the user can quickly and accurately find the focal length when the object is in focus when manually focusing.
在某些实施例中,显示屏还用于显示与合焦信息集合对应的合焦强度曲线。合焦强度可以表征对焦框中对象的图像像素反差值,反差值越大,则表征合焦强度越高。此外,合焦强度也可以表征在某个焦距下存在对象的概率。In some embodiments, the display screen is also used to display an in-focus intensity curve corresponding to the in-focus information set. The in-focus strength can represent the image pixel contrast value of the object in the focus frame, and the larger the contrast value, the higher the in-focus strength. In addition, the in-focus strength can also represent the probability of an object existing at a certain focal length.
例如,合焦强度曲线可以通过如下方式生成。首先,确定待显示合焦信息,待显示合焦信息是合焦信息集合中满足显示条件的焦距信息,显示条件包括与待显示合焦信息对应的合焦强度大于或等于预设强度阈值。然后,基于待显示合焦信息生成合焦强度曲线。For example, the in-focus intensity curve can be generated as follows. First, determine the in-focus information to be displayed. The in-focus information to be displayed is the focal length information in the in-focus information set that meets the display conditions. The display conditions include that the in-focus intensity corresponding to the in-focus information to be displayed is greater than or equal to a preset intensity threshold. Then, an in-focus intensity curve is generated based on the in-focus information to be displayed.
在某些实施例中,合焦信息以合焦强度曲线的形式进行显示,合焦强度曲线所在的二维坐标系包括表征焦距的第一坐标轴和表征合焦强度的第二坐标轴。第一坐标轴和第二坐标轴之间可以相互垂直。例如,第一坐标轴可以是以显示屏的长边为基准的X轴,第二坐标轴可以是以显示屏的宽边为基准的Y轴。In some embodiments, the in-focus information is displayed in the form of an in-focus intensity curve, and the two-dimensional coordinate system where the in-focus intensity curve is located includes a first coordinate axis representing focal length and a second coordinate axis representing in-focus intensity. The first coordinate axis and the second coordinate axis may be perpendicular to each other. For example, the first coordinate axis may be the X axis based on the long side of the display screen, and the second coordinate axis may be the Y axis based on the wide side of the display screen.
图11为本申请实施例提供的合焦强度曲线的示意图。FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an in-focus intensity curve provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图11所示,显示了二维坐标系,其中,横轴表示焦距,纵轴表示合焦强度。As shown in FIG. 11 , a two-dimensional coordinate system is displayed, wherein the horizontal axis represents the focal length, and the vertical axis represents the in-focus intensity.
具体地,绘制一个二维On-Screen display(屏幕菜单式调节方式,简称OSD),横坐标为对焦距离(此距离通过焦距转换得到),纵坐标为合焦强度;另有一个当前焦距指示物指示当前所处的对焦距离(有简易刻度作为提示)。Specifically, draw a two-dimensional On-Screen display (screen menu adjustment method, referred to as OSD), the abscissa is the focus distance (this distance is obtained through focal length conversion), and the ordinate is the focus intensity; there is also a current focus indicator Indicates the current focusing distance (with a simple scale as a reminder).
在反差模式下,当移动对焦环过程中没有得到一个反差曲线峰值情况下,仅仅绘制所获得的反差强度曲线;视图横坐标自适应的缩放到仅仅显示已获得反差强度范围,以突出反差强度内容。一旦移动对焦环过程中得到至少一个峰值(两侧反差强度低于中间反差强度),需要标注此峰值(指示物)。In the contrast mode, when a contrast curve peak value is not obtained during the movement of the focus ring, only the obtained contrast intensity curve is drawn; the abscissa of the view is adaptively zoomed to only display the obtained contrast intensity range to highlight the contrast intensity content . Once at least one peak is obtained during the movement of the focus ring (the contrast intensity on both sides is lower than the contrast intensity in the middle), this peak (indicator) needs to be marked.
在相位模式下,直接将对焦框内的强度曲线绘制到OSD上,并将所有可合焦点作为峰值标注。In phase mode, the intensity curve in the focus frame is directly drawn on the OSD, and all focusable points are marked as peak values.
在某系实施例中,受限于显示屏的显示面积较小,为了更好地显示合焦强度曲线,可以对合焦强度曲线进行诸如:缩放、伸缩、裁剪、形变等处理。In a certain embodiment, limited by the small display area of the display screen, in order to better display the in-focus intensity curve, the in-focus intensity curve may be processed such as scaling, stretching, cropping, and deformation.
图12为本申请实施例提供的处理后的合焦强度曲线的示意图。FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the processed in-focus intensity curve provided by the embodiment of the present application.
例如,当对焦框中存在多个对象,且距离相机较远时,则其合焦强度会相对于近景中对象的合焦强度低一些,这些对象是目标对象的概率也较低。为了减少合焦焦距的数量,可以对这些对象的合焦信息进行过滤。参考图11和图12所示,图11中右侧的第一峰值和第三峰值因合焦强度较低(如低于图11中虚线横线),在图12的上图中已被过滤掉。For example, when there are multiple objects in the focus frame and they are far away from the camera, their in-focus strength will be lower than that of objects in the foreground, and the probability that these objects are target objects is also low. In order to reduce the number of in-focus focal lengths, the in-focus information of these objects can be filtered. Referring to Figure 11 and Figure 12, the first peak and the third peak on the right side in Figure 11 have been filtered in the upper image of Figure 12 because of the low in-focus intensity (such as lower than the dotted horizontal line in Figure 11) Lose.
例如,当某些焦距或某一段焦距不存在合焦信息时,为了避免合焦强度曲线占用过长的空间,可以对合焦强度曲线进行裁剪。参考图11和图12所示,图11中左侧的两个峰值之间不存在合焦强度,在图12的上图中已被过滤掉。For example, when there is no in-focus information for certain focal lengths or a certain section of focal length, the in-focus intensity curve may be clipped in order to prevent the in-focus intensity curve from occupying too much space. Referring to Fig. 11 and Fig. 12, there is no in-focus intensity between the two peaks on the left in Fig. 11, which has been filtered out in the upper image of Fig. 12 .
例如,为了提升合焦强度曲线的美观度,可以将合焦强度曲线抽象成刻度标尺。参考图12的上图所示,存在三个合焦强度较高的峰值,则可以将这三个峰值投影到刻度标尺 上,如图12的下图所示。通过如上操作可以实现在显示屏上示出较规则的合焦强度曲线,减少合焦强度曲线占用的显示空间,提升显示图像的整洁度。For example, in order to improve the aesthetics of the in-focus intensity curve, the in-focus intensity curve can be abstracted into a scale. Referring to the upper figure of Figure 12, there are three peaks with high in-focus intensity, and these three peaks can be projected onto the scale, as shown in the lower figure of Figure 12. Through the above operations, a relatively regular in-focus intensity curve can be displayed on the display screen, the display space occupied by the in-focus intensity curve can be reduced, and the tidiness of the displayed image can be improved.
在某些实施例中,合焦信息集合中至少一个合焦信息各自与对焦框中的子区域之间存在第一对应关系。第一操作包括子区域选取操作。In some embodiments, there is a first corresponding relationship between at least one piece of focus information in the focus information set and the sub-regions in the focus frame. The first operation includes a sub-region selection operation.
相应地,响应于第一操作,控制拍摄装置的镜头基于合焦信息集合自动对焦可以包括如下操作。首先,基于第一对应关系从合焦信息集合中确定与被选取的子区域对应的目标焦距。然后,响应于目标焦距,控制拍摄装置的镜头基于目标焦距自动对焦。Correspondingly, in response to the first operation, controlling the lens of the photographing device to automatically focus based on the focus information set may include the following operations. Firstly, the target focal length corresponding to the selected sub-region is determined from the in-focus information set based on the first correspondence. Then, in response to the target focal length, the lens of the photographing device is controlled to automatically focus based on the target focal length.
其中,第一对应关系可以是固定的。此外,第一对应关系可以是可变的。Wherein, the first corresponding relationship may be fixed. In addition, the first correspondence may be variable.
图13为本申请另一实施例提供的基于合焦信息进行手动辅助对焦的过程示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a process of manually assisting focusing based on focus information provided by another embodiment of the present application.
如图13所示,显示屏上显示有采集的图像和对焦框。在之前的实施例中,相机仅获取了对焦框中包括的合焦信息,但是,用户并不能直观地确定各合焦信息与各对象之间的对应关系。例如,对焦框中存在对象A和对象B,通过像素反差确定存在合焦信息A和合焦信息B,显示屏中可以显示合焦信息A和合焦信息B以便用户进行选取。但是,用户需要基于经验或逻辑推理等方式确定对象A和对象B与合焦信息A和合焦信息B之间的对应关系。或者,用户可以依次选取合焦信息A和合焦信息B来确定与目标对象对应的合焦信息。手动对焦的效率有待进一步提升。As shown in FIG. 13 , the collected images and focus frames are displayed on the display screen. In the previous embodiments, the camera only acquires the in-focus information included in the focus frame, but the user cannot intuitively determine the correspondence between each in-focus information and each object. For example, there are objects A and B in the focus frame, and it is determined by pixel contrast that there are in-focus information A and in-focus information B, and the in-focus information A and in-focus information B can be displayed on the display screen for the user to select. However, the user needs to determine the correspondence between the object A and the object B and the in-focus information A and the in-focus information B based on experience or logical reasoning. Alternatively, the user may sequentially select focus information A and focus information B to determine focus information corresponding to the target object. The efficiency of manual focus needs to be further improved.
为了便于用户快速、准确地选取与目标对象对应的合焦信息,本实施例的摄像装置还进一步提供了第一对应关系,以便选取与目标对象对应的合焦信息。In order to facilitate the user to quickly and accurately select the in-focus information corresponding to the target object, the imaging device of this embodiment further provides a first correspondence so as to select the in-focus information corresponding to the target object.
在某些实施例中,上述方法在获得第一操作之前,还可以包括如下操作:显示与对焦框中至少部分子区域对应的合焦强度。In some embodiments, before obtaining the first operation, the above method may further include the following operation: displaying the in-focus intensity corresponding to at least part of the sub-regions in the focus frame.
在某些实施例中,获得第一操作可以包括如下操作。首先,响应于针对对焦框中子区域的选取操作,确定被选取子区域。然后,基于第一对应关系从合焦信息集合中确定与被选取子区域对应的目标焦距。In some embodiments, obtaining the first operation may include the following operations. Firstly, in response to a selection operation on a sub-region in the focus frame, the selected sub-region is determined. Then, the target focal length corresponding to the selected sub-region is determined from the in-focus information set based on the first correspondence.
以第一对应关系是可变的为例进行说明。参考图13的左图所示,相机可以通过图像处理的方式从对焦框中划分出与各对象对应的显示区域,并且确定与各显示区域对应的合焦信息。这样就可以建立各显示区域与合焦信息之间的对应关系。当用户希望对焦框中头部的图像清晰时,则可通过点击头部的图像来实现合焦信息的选取。例如,首先进行图像处理确定对焦框中存在两个对象的对象图像,然后通过反差模式来确定与各对象图像对应的合焦信息,将确定的合焦信息和对应的对象图像进行绑定。当用户点击头部图像时,则相机可以基于头部图像确定对应的合焦信息,然后基于该合焦信息进行自动对焦。The first correspondence is variable as an example for illustration. Referring to the left figure of FIG. 13 , the camera can divide the display area corresponding to each object from the focus frame by means of image processing, and determine the in-focus information corresponding to each display area. In this way, the corresponding relationship between each display area and the in-focus information can be established. When the user wants the image of the head in the focus frame to be clear, the selection of in-focus information can be realized by clicking the image of the head. For example, image processing is first performed to determine that there are two object images in the focus frame, and then focus information corresponding to each object image is determined through a contrast mode, and the determined focus information is bound to the corresponding object image. When the user clicks on the head image, the camera can determine corresponding in-focus information based on the head image, and then automatically focus based on the in-focus information.
以第一对应关系是固定的为例进行说明。参考图13的右图所示,可以预先将对焦框划分为多个子区域,各子区域相对于对焦框的位置是固定的,在获取到针对各子区域的合焦信息时,就可以建立各子区域与合焦信息之间的对应关系。由于将对焦框划分成了多个子区域,一个子区域中包括多个对象的概率大大降低,有效减少了与一个子区域对应的合焦信息的数量,以便于用户通过点击某个子区域即可快速确定与目标对象对应的合焦信息。如目标对象的图像显示在某个子区域中,则可以点击该子区域来选取与目标对象对应的合焦信息。例如,当用户点击头部图像所在的子区域时,则相机可以基于头部图像确定对应的合焦信息,然后基于该合焦信息进行自动对焦。The first correspondence is fixed as an example for illustration. Referring to the right figure of Fig. 13, the focus frame can be divided into multiple sub-regions in advance, and the position of each sub-region relative to the focus frame is fixed. When the in-focus information for each sub-region is obtained, each sub-region can be established. Correspondence between sub-regions and in-focus information. Since the focus frame is divided into multiple sub-areas, the probability of including multiple objects in one sub-area is greatly reduced, effectively reducing the amount of in-focus information corresponding to one sub-area, so that users can quickly click on a sub-area In-focus information corresponding to the target object is determined. If the image of the target object is displayed in a certain sub-area, the sub-area may be clicked to select in-focus information corresponding to the target object. For example, when the user clicks on the sub-area where the head image is located, the camera may determine corresponding focus information based on the head image, and then perform automatic focusing based on the focus information.
需要说明的是,对焦框的面积可能较小,为了便于用户能够从对焦框中准确地选取子区域,可以在显示界面上提供一块区域用于放大显示对焦框中图像,这样有助于提升用户选取子区域的便捷度和准确度。It should be noted that the area of the focus frame may be small. In order to facilitate the user to accurately select a sub-area from the focus frame, an area can be provided on the display interface for zooming in on the image in the focus frame. Ease and accuracy of selecting sub-regions.
在某些实施例中,当已经存在至少一个合焦强度峰值情况下,可随时进入粘滞对焦模式。如一旦对焦框朝向有峰值的方向旋转到一定幅度(或者速度),则自动快速对焦到此方向最近的一个合焦强度峰值处,此时当前焦距指示物变化颜色(比如从红色变为绿色)以体现合焦。In some embodiments, the sticky focus mode may be entered at any time when there is at least one in-focus intensity peak. For example, once the focus frame rotates to a certain extent (or speed) in the direction of the peak value, it will automatically and quickly focus to the nearest focus intensity peak in this direction, and the current focus indicator will change color (for example, from red to green) to show focus.
为了降低拍摄装置为了频繁的获取合焦信息集合,导致的能耗过大、磨损老化等,可以仅在满足条件时执行获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合的操作。In order to reduce excessive energy consumption, wear and aging caused by frequent acquisition of focus information sets by the photographing device, the operation of acquiring focus information sets for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may be performed only when conditions are met.
在某些实施例中,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合可以包括如下操作。In some embodiments, acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may include the following operations.
例如,响应于指示进入手动辅助对焦模式的第二操作,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合。其中,第二操作的形式可以同第一操作,如按压与进入手动辅助对焦模式功能对应的按键、在显示界面上点击与进入手动辅助对焦模式功能对应的虚拟按键等。需要说明的是,一个按键可以用于实现一个或多个功能,如快门按键在不同状态下可以激活不同的功能,在半按状态下对应切换至手动辅助对焦功能和激活对焦框的功能,在全按下装下对应拍摄功能。For example, in response to the second operation indicating to enter the manual assisted focus mode, a set of focus information for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is acquired. Wherein, the form of the second operation may be the same as the first operation, such as pressing a button corresponding to the function of entering the manual auxiliary focus mode, clicking a virtual button corresponding to the function of entering the manual auxiliary focus mode on the display interface, and the like. It should be noted that one button can be used to realize one or more functions, for example, the shutter button can activate different functions in different states, and it can switch to the manual auxiliary focus function and activate the focus frame function in the half-press state. Fully press down the corresponding shooting function.
例如,响应于表征变焦趋势的第三操作,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合。在本实施例中,可以在用户执行变焦操作时,执行获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合的操作。在进行手动对焦操作之前较长的时间获取的合焦信息,可能由于用户在进行操作的过程中可能存在晃动、移动等情形发生,目标对 象也可能存在晃动、移动等情形发生,导致合焦信息发生改变。为了改善上述情况,在用户开始执行变焦操作之后再获取合焦信息,有效减少了执行变焦操作和获取合焦信息两个操作之间的时间间隔,有助于提升得到的合焦信息的准确度。For example, in response to the third operation representing the zoom trend, a set of focus information for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is acquired. In this embodiment, when the user performs a zoom operation, an operation of acquiring a focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may be performed. The in-focus information obtained a long time before the manual focus operation may be caused by the shaking or moving of the user during the operation, or the shaking or moving of the target object, resulting in the in-focus information changes happened. In order to improve the above situation, the focus information is obtained after the user starts to perform the zoom operation, which effectively reduces the time interval between performing the zoom operation and obtaining the focus information, and helps to improve the accuracy of the obtained focus information .
在某些实施例中,响应于指示进入手动辅助对焦模式的第二操作,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合可以包括如下所示的操作。例如,响应于第二操作,基于传感器获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合。In some embodiments, in response to the second operation indicating to enter the manual assisted focus mode, acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may include the following operations. For example, in response to the second operation, the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is acquired based on the sensor.
其中,传感器可以用于测量对象与拍摄装置(或镜片组)之间的距离。传感器可以设置在拍摄装置上,如相机自带的传感器或外挂的传感器。传感器可以设置在承载拍摄装置的支架上,如设置在安装拍摄装置的安装板上、设置在云台的支架上或设置在云台的把持组件上等。传感器可以设置搭载拍摄装置的移动平台上,如设置在无人机或陆地机器人上等。传感器的具体设置位置不做限定。Among them, the sensor can be used to measure the distance between the object and the camera (or lens group). The sensor can be set on the shooting device, such as a built-in sensor of the camera or an external sensor. The sensor can be arranged on a bracket carrying the shooting device, such as on a mounting plate on which the shooting device is installed, on a bracket of a pan-tilt, or on a handle assembly of a pan-tilt. The sensor can be set on a mobile platform equipped with a camera, such as a drone or a land robot. The specific setting position of the sensor is not limited.
传感器包括但不限于以下至少一种:激光测距仪、红外测距仪等直接测量类型的传感器,以及惯性测量单元(IMU)、速度计、加速度传感器等累加测量类型的传感器。其中,传感器可以设置在拍摄装置、搭载拍摄装置的云台或搭载拍摄装置的移动平台上,以用于确定设置惯性测量单元主体的姿态信息。例如,对于云台而言,为了便于确定拍摄装置的姿态信息,该惯性测量单元可以设置在拍摄装置固定机构上,用于测量固定机构的姿态信息。惯性测量单元可以是加速度计或陀螺仪中的至少一种,可以用于测量拍摄装置的姿态和加速度等。The sensors include but are not limited to at least one of the following: direct measurement sensors such as laser range finders and infrared range finders, and accumulative measurement sensors such as inertial measurement units (IMUs), speedometers, and acceleration sensors. Wherein, the sensor can be arranged on the photographing device, the pan/tilt equipped with the photographing device, or the mobile platform equipped with the photographing device, so as to determine the attitude information of the main body of the inertial measurement unit. For example, for the pan/tilt, in order to facilitate determining the attitude information of the photographing device, the inertial measurement unit may be arranged on the fixing mechanism of the photographing device for measuring the attitude information of the fixing mechanism. The inertial measurement unit may be at least one of an accelerometer or a gyroscope, and may be used to measure the attitude and acceleration of the photographing device.
以用户手持的拍摄装置为例进行示例性说明。单目(单个镜头)的拍摄装置中设置有结构光、景深检测(也称为时差法,Time of flight,简称TOF)等可以实现测距的传感器。双目的拍摄装置或者多目的拍摄装置可以基于双目各自视角下针对同一对象拍摄的图像,来计算距离。The photographing device held by the user is taken as an example for illustration. The monocular (single lens) shooting device is equipped with sensors such as structured light and depth of field detection (also known as time-of-flight, Time of flight, TOF for short), etc., which can realize distance measurement. The binocular photographing device or the multi-purpose photographing device can calculate the distance based on the images captured for the same object under the respective perspectives of the binoculars.
IMU等传感器可以用来辅助确定距离,如在已知目标对象和拍摄装置之间的距离的场景中,可以基于IMU检测拍摄装置自身发生的位移和方向,这样可以基于该距离和位移更新目标对象和拍摄装置之间的距离。IMU是测量物体三轴姿态角(或角速率)以及加速度的装置。IMU内可以设置有三轴陀螺仪和三轴加速度计,通过测量物体在三维空间的角速度和加速度解算出物体的位姿。Sensors such as IMU can be used to assist in determining the distance. For example, in a scene where the distance between the target object and the shooting device is known, the displacement and direction of the shooting device itself can be detected based on the IMU, so that the target object can be updated based on the distance and displacement. distance from the camera. IMU is a device that measures the three-axis attitude angle (or angular rate) and acceleration of an object. A three-axis gyroscope and a three-axis accelerometer can be installed in the IMU, and the pose of the object can be calculated by measuring the angular velocity and acceleration of the object in three-dimensional space.
例如,惯性测量单元可以包括陀螺仪和/或加速度计,陀螺仪可以用于确定云台的角加速度信息,加速度计可以用于确定云台的加速度信息。由于拍摄装置和云台之间可以是相互固定的,可以用云台的角加速度信息和加速度信息来表征拍摄装置的姿态信息和加速 度信息。For example, the inertial measurement unit may include a gyroscope and/or an accelerometer, the gyroscope may be used to determine the angular acceleration information of the gimbal, and the accelerometer may be used to determine the acceleration information of the gimbal. Since the shooting device and the gimbal can be fixed to each other, the angular acceleration information and acceleration information of the gimbal can be used to characterize the attitude information and acceleration information of the shooting device.
例如,在相位模式下,通过相机传感器集成的相位对焦信息,预先获得ROI内所有可合焦焦距,得到合焦强度曲线。For example, in the phase mode, through the phase focus information integrated by the camera sensor, all focusable focal lengths in the ROI are obtained in advance, and the focus intensity curve is obtained.
需要说明的是,为了保证合焦信息的准确度:在满足重新计算条件时,输出重新测距提示信息或者强制终止使用IMU输出的信息来确定对象和拍摄装置之间的距离。由于IMU检测精度有限,或者受到IMU自身特性(如针对大加速度场景下检测精度低于针对小加速度场景下检测精度)的影响,基于一次初始化后的IMU来确定拍摄装置的移动距离的适用场景有限。因此,可以及时提示用户重新初始化对象与拍摄装置之间的距离,以提升得到的合焦信息准确度。It should be noted that, in order to ensure the accuracy of the in-focus information: when the recalculation condition is met, output a re-ranging prompt message or forcefully stop using the information output by the IMU to determine the distance between the object and the camera. Due to the limited detection accuracy of the IMU, or the influence of the IMU's own characteristics (such as the detection accuracy for high-acceleration scenarios is lower than that for low-acceleration scenarios), the applicable scenarios for determining the moving distance of the camera based on the IMU after one initialization are limited. . Therefore, the user can be promptly prompted to re-initialize the distance between the object and the photographing device, so as to improve the accuracy of the obtained focus information.
例如,重新初始化距离条件包括以下至少一种:惯性测量单元经历过下电操作、相机或云台经历过下电操作、相机或云台在下电状态下发生的位移超过重新标定位移阈值或者惯性测量单元的加速度大于设定加速度阈值。For example, the reinitialization distance condition includes at least one of the following: the inertial measurement unit has experienced a power-off operation, the camera or the gimbal has experienced a power-off operation, the displacement of the camera or gimbal in the power-off state exceeds the recalibration displacement threshold, or the inertial measurement The acceleration of the unit is greater than the set acceleration threshold.
在某些实施例中,响应于指示进入手动辅助对焦模式的第二操作,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合可以包括如下所示的操作。例如,响应于第二操作,通过调整镜头的焦距,基于当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的像素反差,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合。In some embodiments, in response to the second operation indicating to enter the manual assisted focus mode, acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may include the following operations. For example, in response to the second operation, by adjusting the focal length of the lens, based on the pixel contrast of the at least one object in the focus frame of the current image, the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is acquired.
例如,可以通过如下方式确定目标对象与相机之间的距离以及对应的合焦焦距:基于在镜头与摄像面的位置关系不同的状态下摄像到的多个图像的模糊量来确定距离。在此,将该方式称为模糊检测自动聚焦(Bokeh Detection Auto Foucus,简称BDAF)方式。For example, the distance between the target object and the camera and the corresponding in-focus focal length may be determined by determining the distance based on the amount of blur of multiple images captured when the positional relationship between the lens and the imaging surface is different. Here, this method is referred to as a Bokeh Detection Auto Focus (BDAF for short) method.
例如,图像的模糊量(Cost)能够使用高斯函数由下式(2)表示。在式(2)中,x表示水平方向上的像素位置。σ表示标准偏差值。For example, the amount of blur (Cost) of an image can be represented by the following equation (2) using a Gaussian function. In Equation (2), x represents a pixel position in the horizontal direction. σ represents the standard deviation value.
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000001
通过使聚焦透镜对准到与图像的模糊量曲线的极小点对应的透镜位置,从而能够使焦点对准图像中包含的目标对象。By aligning the focus lens to the lens position corresponding to the minimum point of the blur amount curve of the image, it is possible to focus on the target object included in the image.
在某些实施例中,基于传感器获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合可以包括如下操作。In some embodiments, acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image based on the sensor may include the following operations.
首先,通过传感器按照预设采样周期获取与当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象各自的合焦焦距,其中,基于合焦焦距进行拍摄的图像满足预设成像条件。Firstly, the in-focus focal length of at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is acquired by the sensor according to a preset sampling period, wherein the image captured based on the in-focus focal length satisfies the preset imaging condition.
然后,将至少部分合焦焦距和与至少部分合焦焦距各自对应的合焦强度信息作为合焦 信息。Then, at least part of the in-focus focal length and the in-focus intensity information corresponding to at least part of the in-focus focal length are used as in-focus information.
在某些实施例中,通过调整镜头的焦距,基于当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的像素反差,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合可以包括如下操作。In some embodiments, acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image based on the pixel contrast of the at least one object in the focus frame of the current image by adjusting the focal length of the lens may include the following operations.
首先,在将镜头的焦距从第一预设焦距调整至第二预设焦距的过程中,获得多个拍摄面的图像信息。其中,第一预设焦距可以是当前焦距、镜头的最小焦距或者镜头的最大焦距中任意一种。第二预设焦距可以是相对于当前焦距之后具有指定焦距差的焦距、镜头的最大焦距或者镜头的最小焦距中任意一种。Firstly, during the process of adjusting the focal length of the lens from the first preset focal length to the second preset focal length, image information of multiple shooting surfaces is obtained. Wherein, the first preset focal length may be any one of the current focal length, the minimum focal length of the lens, or the maximum focal length of the lens. The second preset focal length may be any one of a focal length having a designated focal length difference relative to the current focal length, a maximum focal length of the lens, or a minimum focal length of the lens.
然后,从多个拍摄面中确定合焦拍摄面,合焦拍摄面的图像信息中存在相邻像素反差超过预设反差阈值的像素。Then, the in-focus shooting surface is determined from the plurality of shooting surfaces, and there are pixels whose adjacent pixel contrast exceeds a preset contrast threshold in the image information of the in-focus shooting surface.
接着,将至少部分与合焦拍摄面对应的合焦焦距和相应的合焦强度作为合焦信息。Next, at least part of the in-focus focal length corresponding to the in-focus shooting surface and the corresponding in-focus intensity are used as in-focus information.
通过以上方式即可实现:计算当前焦距下对焦框内图像的反差强度,随着变焦环的旋转,得到所经过焦距对应的反差强度值,进而得到反差强度曲线,作为合焦强度曲线。It can be realized by the above method: calculate the contrast intensity of the image in the focus frame at the current focal length, and obtain the contrast intensity value corresponding to the passed focal length with the rotation of the zoom ring, and then obtain the contrast intensity curve as the in-focus intensity curve.
具体地,首先,在镜头和摄像面处于第一位置关系的状态(如第一焦距)下,拍摄第一张图像,并保存在存储器中。接着,通过使聚焦透镜或图像传感器在镜片组的光轴方向上移动,从而使得镜头与摄像面处于第二位置关系的状态(如第二焦距)下。在该第二焦距下拍摄第二张图像,并保存在存储器中。这样可以确定第一张图像和第二张图像中针对同一对象的图像模糊量。重复多次上述过程即可得到:在不同焦距下针对同一对象的多个图像模糊量,该多个图像模糊量可以形成图像模糊量曲线。将图像模糊量曲线的极小点对应的焦距作为目标焦距。此外,还可以基于该目标焦距得到目标对象和镜头之间的物距。Specifically, firstly, when the lens and the imaging plane are in the first positional relationship (for example, the first focal length), the first image is captured and stored in the memory. Next, by moving the focusing lens or the image sensor in the direction of the optical axis of the lens group, the lens and the imaging surface are in a state of a second positional relationship (such as a second focal length). A second image is taken at this second focal length and stored in memory. This determines the amount of image blur for the same object in the first image and the second image. Repeating the above process for several times can obtain: multiple image blurring amounts for the same object at different focal lengths, and the multiple image blurring amounts can form an image blurring amount curve. The focal length corresponding to the minimum point of the image blur amount curve is taken as the target focal length. In addition, the object distance between the target object and the lens can also be obtained based on the target focal length.
例如,可以采用爬山AF那样,使聚焦透镜或图像传感器在光轴方向上移动,并且不会超过对焦点。聚焦透镜或图像传感器的移动量,例如可以是5μm、10μm、15μm等。For example, like mountain-climbing AF, the focus lens or image sensor can be moved in the direction of the optical axis without exceeding the focus point. The amount of movement of the focus lens or the image sensor can be, for example, 5 μm, 10 μm, 15 μm, or the like.
在一个具体实施例中,将镜头的焦距从第一预设焦距调整至第二预设焦距包括:将镜头的焦距从镜头的最小焦距调整至镜头的最大焦距。In a specific embodiment, adjusting the focal length of the lens from the first preset focal length to the second preset focal length includes: adjusting the focal length of the lens from the minimum focal length of the lens to the maximum focal length of the lens.
例如,在激活对焦框之后,将镜头的焦距从镜头的最小焦距调整至镜头的最大焦距,这样就可以基于在各焦距下采集图像的反差值,来确定合焦平面以及与合焦平面对应的合焦焦距。一个合焦平面可以对应一个或多个对象的清晰图像。For example, after activating the focus frame, adjust the focal length of the lens from the minimum focal length of the lens to the maximum focal length of the lens, so that the focal plane and the corresponding focal plane can be determined based on the contrast values of the images collected at each focal length. In-focus focal length. A plane of focus can correspond to a sharp image of one or more objects.
在某些实施例中,可以在检测到变焦操作之后,再获取对焦框中包括的对象的合焦信息。具体地,镜头包括变焦环。In some embodiments, the in-focus information of the object included in the focus frame may be acquired after the zoom operation is detected. Specifically, the lens includes a zoom ring.
相应地,响应于表征变焦趋势的第三操作,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对 象的合焦信息集合可以包括如下操作。Correspondingly, in response to the third operation representing the zoom trend, acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may include the following operations.
首先,获取第三操作,第三操作使得变焦环转动。其中,第三操作的操作方式可以同第一操作,在此不做限定。First, a third operation is acquired, which causes the zoom ring to rotate. Wherein, the operation manner of the third operation may be the same as that of the first operation, which is not limited here.
然后,响应于第三操作,将镜头的焦距从当前焦距调整至最大焦距或者最小焦距的过程中,获得多个拍摄面的图像信息。Then, in response to the third operation, during the process of adjusting the focal length of the lens from the current focal length to the maximum focal length or the minimum focal length, image information of multiple shooting surfaces is obtained.
接着,从多个拍摄面中确定合焦拍摄面,合焦拍摄面的图像信息中存在相邻像素反差超过预设反差阈值的像素。Next, the in-focus shooting surface is determined from the plurality of shooting surfaces, and there are pixels whose adjacent pixel contrast exceeds a preset contrast threshold in the image information of the in-focus shooting surface.
然后,将至少部分合焦焦距和相应的合焦强度作为合焦信息。Then, use at least part of the focus focal length and the corresponding focus strength as the focus information.
在某些实施例中,获得第二操作可以包括以下至少一种:接收针对预设按键的操作、接收针对预设交互组件的操作或者接收预设操作手势。In some embodiments, obtaining the second operation may include at least one of the following: receiving an operation on a preset key, receiving an operation on a preset interactive component, or receiving a preset operation gesture.
其中,预设按键可以设置在:拍摄装置、承载拍摄装置的云台(如云台的把持组件)、承载拍摄装置的移动平台的控制终端(如遥控器等)之上。Wherein, the preset button can be set on: the photographing device, the pan/tilt carrying the photographing device (such as the handle assembly of the pan/tilt), and the control terminal (such as a remote controller, etc.) of the mobile platform carrying the photographing device.
预设交互组件可以显示在拍摄装置的显示屏、承载拍摄装置的云台的显示屏或者承载拍摄装置的移动平台的控制终端的显示屏之上。The preset interactive component can be displayed on the display screen of the shooting device, the display screen of the pan/tilt carrying the shooting device, or the display screen of the control terminal of the mobile platform carrying the shooting device.
操作手势可以通过图像处理器或遥控器等进行采集。The operation gestures can be collected by an image processor or a remote controller.
在某些实施例中,获得第二操作包括:预设按键被按下第一指定位移时生成第二操作,其中,预设按键具有至少两个指定位移,第一指定位移是至少两个指定位移中的一个。其中,预设按键可以是快门按键等。In some embodiments, obtaining the second operation includes: generating the second operation when the preset key is pressed with a first specified displacement, wherein the preset button has at least two specified displacements, and the first specified displacement is at least two specified displacements. One of the displacements. Wherein, the preset button may be a shutter button or the like.
在某些实施例中,在预设按键被按下第一指定位移之后,上述方法还可以包括如下操作。In some embodiments, after the preset key is pressed for a first specified distance, the above method may further include the following operations.
首先,获得第四操作,第四操作是预设按键被按下第二指定位移,其中,第一指定位移和第二指定位移分别是至少两个指定位移中的一个。然后,响应于第四操作,采集图像信息。Firstly, a fourth operation is obtained. The fourth operation is a second designated displacement when the preset key is pressed, wherein the first designated displacement and the second designated displacement are respectively one of at least two designated displacements. Then, in response to the fourth operation, image information is acquired.
在一些实施例中,在手动对焦模式下,用户一旦半按快门按键,则进入手动辅助对焦模式。在此模式下通过IMU和视觉方式锁定对焦框内的对焦对象,即便镜头和/或机身发生晃动,或者,镜头和/或机身发生移动,对焦框仍然锁定到对焦对象上,这样可以支持先对焦后构图拍摄方式。In some embodiments, in the manual focus mode, once the user presses the shutter button halfway, the user enters the manual assisted focus mode. In this mode, the focus object in the focus frame is locked by IMU and visual means. Even if the lens and/or body shakes, or the lens and/or body moves, the focus frame is still locked to the focus object, which can support Focus first and then compose the picture.
以下以通过相机的快门按键获得第二操作和第四操作为例进行示例性说明。The following takes the second operation and the fourth operation obtained through the shutter button of the camera as an example for illustrative description.
图14为本申请实施例提供的预设按键状态与显示屏上对应显示图像的示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of preset button states and corresponding displayed images on the display screen provided by the embodiment of the present application.
如图14所示,左侧示出的是快门按钮的状态,右侧是显示屏中示出的与快门按钮的 状态对应的显示图像。图14的上图中,示出了取景图像,当按钮处于半按状态下时,获得了第二操作,在取景图像中显示了对焦框。图14的下图中,当用户完全按下快门按键之后,进行图像采集和保存,并可以在显示屏上显示出拍摄的图像。在户完全按下快门按键并松开快门按键之后,可以在显示屏上示出选项:保存和删除按钮,以供用户选取。As shown in Figure 14, the state of the shutter button is shown on the left, and the display image corresponding to the state of the shutter button is shown on the right side of the display. The upper figure of FIG. 14 shows a framing image. When the button is half-pressed, the second operation is obtained, and a focus frame is displayed in the framing image. In the lower figure of FIG. 14 , after the user fully presses the shutter button, the image is collected and saved, and the captured image can be displayed on the display screen. After the user fully presses the shutter button and releases the shutter button, options: save and delete buttons may be shown on the display screen for selection by the user.
通过将进入手动辅助对焦功能的按键和拍摄功能的按键集成设置在同一个按键处,无需新增按键,提升空间利用率。By integrating the button for entering the manual auxiliary focus function and the button for the shooting function into the same button, there is no need to add new buttons, and the space utilization rate is improved.
在某些实施例中,为了提升合焦信息的准确度以保证拍摄图像中目标对象的清晰度,可以在满足退出手动辅助对焦模式条件后,退出手动辅助对焦模式。其中,在满足手动辅助对焦模式条件时,已有的合焦信息可能导致采集的目标对象的图像清晰度较低。In some embodiments, in order to improve the accuracy of the focus information to ensure the clarity of the target object in the captured image, the manual assisted focus mode may be exited after the conditions for exiting the manual assisted focus mode are met. Wherein, when the manual assisted focusing mode condition is met, the existing in-focus information may result in a lower definition of the captured image of the target object.
图15为本申请另一实施例提供的控制方法的流程示意图。Fig. 15 is a schematic flowchart of a control method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
如图15所示,上述方法在执行操作S306获得第二操作之后,还可以包括操作S1508。As shown in FIG. 15 , the above method may further include operation S1508 after performing operation S306 to obtain the second operation.
在操作S1508,如果确定满足退出手动辅助对焦模式的条件,则退出手动辅助对焦模式。In operation S1508, if it is determined that the condition for exiting the manual assisted focusing mode is satisfied, the manual assisted focusing mode is exited.
在某些实施例中,退出手动辅助对焦模式的条件包括以下至少一种。In some embodiments, the conditions for exiting the manual assisted focusing mode include at least one of the following.
例如,预设按键处于与退出手动辅助对焦模式对应的状态。当用户希望退出手动辅助对焦模式时,则可以退出该模式。例如,用户松开快门按键、用户选择了自动对焦模式、用户关机等。For example, the preset button is in a state corresponding to exiting the manual assisted focusing mode. When the user wishes to exit the manual assisted focus mode, the mode can be exited. For example, the user releases the shutter button, the user selects an auto-focus mode, the user turns off the phone, and so on.
例如,目标对象移动至对焦框之外,其中,对焦框中具有多个对象,每个对象与合焦信息集合中合焦信息之间存在第二对应关系。目标对象可以是与用户确定的合焦信息对应的对象。参考图8所示,如用户将镜头焦距变焦至合焦焦距3,没有松开快门按键,并且也没有再转动变焦环,但是,与合焦焦距3对应的对象的图像已位于对焦框之外,则可以确定当前已满足退出手动辅助对焦模式的条件。For example, the target object moves out of the focus frame, wherein there are multiple objects in the focus frame, and there is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the focus information in the focus information set. The target object may be an object corresponding to in-focus information determined by the user. Referring to Fig. 8, if the user zooms the lens focal length to the in-focus focal length 3, the shutter button is not released, and the zoom ring is not turned again, however, the image of the object corresponding to the in-focus focal length 3 is already outside the focus frame , it can be determined that the condition for exiting the manual assisted focus mode has been satisfied.
例如,拍摄装置仅能通过调整镜头确定对焦框的合焦信息,并且目标对象相对于镜头发生相向方向位移或者相背方向位移,其中,对焦框包括多个对象,每个对象与合焦信息集合中合焦信息之间存在第二对应关系。在合焦信息已经确定的前提下,如果目标对象相对于镜头发生相向方向位移或者相背方向位移,则不便于通过反差模式对合焦信息进行更新或补偿。为了保证合焦信息的准确度,可以确定当前已满足退出手动辅助对焦模式的条件。For example, the shooting device can only determine the in-focus information of the focus frame by adjusting the lens, and the target object is displaced in the opposite direction or in the opposite direction relative to the lens, wherein the focus frame includes multiple objects, and each object is combined with the in-focus information There is a second corresponding relationship between the in-focus information. On the premise that the in-focus information has been determined, if the target object is displaced in the opposite direction or in the opposite direction relative to the lens, it is not convenient to update or compensate the in-focus information through the contrast mode. In order to ensure the accuracy of the focus information, it may be determined that the current condition for exiting the manual assisted focus mode is satisfied.
此外,对于至少基于IMU输出的信息来确定对象和拍摄装置之间的距离的方案,退出手动辅助对焦模式的条件还可以包括以下至少一种:惯性测量单元经历过下电操作、 相机或云台经历过下电操作、相机或云台在下电状态下发生的位移超过重新标定位移阈值或者惯性测量单元的加速度大于设定加速度阈值。当这些条件中至少一种被满足时,则无法保证合焦信息的准确度,可以退出手动辅助对焦模式。In addition, for the scheme of determining the distance between the object and the shooting device at least based on the information output by the IMU, the conditions for exiting the manual assisted focusing mode may also include at least one of the following: the inertial measurement unit has experienced a power-off operation, the camera or the gimbal After a power-off operation, the displacement of the camera or gimbal in the power-off state exceeds the recalibration displacement threshold, or the acceleration of the inertial measurement unit is greater than the set acceleration threshold. When at least one of these conditions is met, the accuracy of the focus information cannot be guaranteed, and the manual assisted focus mode can be exited.
图16为本申请实施例提供的退出手动辅助对焦时显示图像的示意图。FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of an image displayed when exiting manual assisted focusing according to an embodiment of the present application.
如图16所示,左上图中是用户进行变焦操作之后,对焦框中显示的图像。图像中用户头像与树叶之间具有第一距离。在完成手动辅助对焦之后,用户可以进行图像采集操作。As shown in FIG. 16 , the upper left image is the image displayed in the focus frame after the user performs a zoom operation. There is a first distance between the user avatar and the leaves in the image. After completing the manual assisted focusing, the user can perform image acquisition operations.
图16的右上图中是用户进行变焦操作之后,在进行拍摄之前,拍摄对象发生了移动,导致图像中用户头像与树叶之间具有第二距离,但是,此时图像中用户头像和树叶还都位于对焦框,可以认为拍摄对象与拍摄装置之间的距离没有发生明显改变,基于合焦信息进行自动对焦可以得到拍摄对象的清晰图像。此时,无需退出手动辅助对焦模式,仍然可以进行拍摄。In the upper right picture of Fig. 16 , after the user performs the zoom operation, the subject moves before shooting, resulting in a second distance between the user's avatar and the leaves in the image, but at this time, the user's avatar and the leaves are still in the image In the focus frame, it can be considered that the distance between the subject and the shooting device has not changed significantly, and autofocus based on the focus information can obtain a clear image of the subject. At this point, you can still shoot without exiting the manual assisted focus mode.
图16的下图中是用户进行变焦操作之后,在进行拍摄之前,拍摄对象发生了移动,导致图像中用户头像位于对焦框之外,可以认为拍摄对象与拍摄装置之间的距离发生了改变,基于已有的合焦信息进行自动对焦,存在较大的概率无法得到拍摄对象的清晰图像。此时,可以退出手动辅助对焦模式,如对焦框不再显示。当然,用户可以重新进入手动辅助对焦模式以进行对焦和拍摄。In the lower picture of Figure 16, after the user performs the zoom operation, the subject moves before taking pictures, causing the user's avatar in the image to be outside the focus frame. It can be considered that the distance between the subject and the shooting device has changed. Autofocus based on the existing focus information has a high probability that a clear image of the subject cannot be obtained. At this point, you can exit the manual assisted focus mode, such as the focus frame is no longer displayed. Of course, users can re-enter manual assisted focus mode to focus and shoot.
例如,发生以下至少一种情形:对焦对象移出屏幕、用户松开快门按键、对焦对象纵向移动(反差模式下),则可以退出手动辅助对焦模式。For example, if at least one of the following situations occurs: the focused object moves out of the screen, the user releases the shutter button, or the focused object moves vertically (in contrast mode), then the manual assisted focusing mode can be exited.
需要说明的是,如果对焦框因追踪拍摄对象而移动了位置,则当退出手动辅助对焦模式之后,对焦框可以恢复到普通预览模式下的用户指定位置,如恢复到显示屏的中心位置。It should be noted that if the focus frame moves due to tracking the subject, after exiting the manual assisted focus mode, the focus frame can return to the user-specified position in the normal preview mode, such as the center of the display screen.
在某些实施例中,为了提升合焦信息集合中合焦信息的准确度,还可以对已有的合焦信息进行更新。In some embodiments, in order to improve the accuracy of the focus information in the focus information set, the existing focus information may also be updated.
图17为本申请另一实施例提供的控制方法的流程示意图。Fig. 17 is a schematic flowchart of a control method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
如图17所示,上述方法在获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合之后,还可以包括操作S1710。As shown in FIG. 17 , after acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image, the above method may further include operation S1710.
在操作S1710,基于合焦信息集合中合焦信息的改变量对合焦信息集合进行补偿。In operation S1710, the in-focus information set is compensated based on a change amount of the in-focus information in the in-focus information set.
在某些实施例中,基于合焦信息集合中合焦信息的改变量对合焦信息集合进行补偿可以包括如下操作,首先,确定镜头的位姿变化信息。然后,基于镜头的位姿变化信息对合焦信息集合进行补偿。In some embodiments, compensating the focus information set based on the change amount of the focus information in the focus information set may include the following operations. First, determine the pose change information of the lens. Then, the focus information set is compensated based on the pose change information of the lens.
例如,可以根据位置改变量对合焦信息进行补偿。例如,根据拍摄装置的位置改变量 对对焦框中对象的合焦焦距进行补偿。For example, the in-focus information can be compensated according to the position change amount. For example, the in-focus focal length of the object in the focus frame is compensated according to the amount of change in the position of the camera.
在本实施例中,位置改变量可以作为拍摄对象相对于某个镜头的物距改变量,基于该物距改变量可以确定针对该某个镜头的像距改变量,进而基于该相距改变量来对合焦信息集合进行补偿,以保证合焦信息的准确度,提升基于合焦信息进行自动变焦操作的对焦准确度。In this embodiment, the position change amount can be used as the object distance change amount of the shooting object relative to a certain lens, based on the object distance change amount, the image distance change amount for the certain lens can be determined, and then based on the distance change amount to determine The set of focus information is compensated to ensure the accuracy of the focus information and improve the focus accuracy of the automatic zoom operation based on the focus information.
拍摄对象可以是静止的,如当拍摄对象是静止的时候,可以仅依靠IMU来解算拍摄装置的位置改变量来确定拍摄对象相对于拍摄装置之间距离的改变量。此外,拍摄对象也可以是移动的,此时,可以基于IMU解算的拍摄装置的位置改变量,来优化其它方式确定的拍摄对象相对于拍摄装置之间距离的改变量。The object to be photographed may be stationary. For example, when the object to be photographed is stationary, only the IMU may be used to calculate the amount of change in the position of the photographing device to determine the amount of change in the distance between the photographing object and the photographing device. In addition, the photographed object may also be moving. In this case, the change amount of the distance between the photographed object and the photographic device determined in other ways may be optimized based on the position change amount of the photographic device calculated by the IMU.
例如,相关技术中还可以通过如下方式确定拍摄对象相对于拍摄装置之间距离的改变量。以对焦场景为例,可以通过飞行时间法(Time of flight,简称TOF)进行目标测距、通过画面对比度进行对焦位置搜索(简称CDAF)、或者通过PDAF像素点对对角位置进行测量和预估,实现对焦控制。For example, in the related art, the change amount of the distance between the shooting object and the shooting device may also be determined in the following manner. Taking the focus scene as an example, you can use Time of Flight (TOF) for target distance measurement, screen contrast for focus position search (abbreviated as CDAF), or measure and estimate the diagonal position through PDAF pixels. , to achieve focus control.
以拍摄对象是移动的场景为例进行示例性说明。A scene in which the subject is moving is taken as an example for illustration.
在某些实施例中,确定镜头的位姿变化信息可以包括如下操作:基于惯性测量单元确定镜头的位姿变化信息,位姿变化信息包括位移信息和角度变化信息中至少一种。In some embodiments, determining the pose change information of the lens may include the following operations: determining the pose change information of the lens based on an inertial measurement unit, where the pose change information includes at least one of displacement information and angle change information.
TOF、CDAF和PDAF可以在进入手动辅助对焦模式时,获取对焦框中包括的对象的合焦信息,然后通过IMU解算的拍摄装置的位置改变量,来优化诸如TOF、CDAF或PDAF等在一些场景下的测距效果。TOF, CDAF and PDAF can obtain the in-focus information of the objects included in the focus frame when entering the manual assisted focus mode, and then use the position change of the shooting device calculated by the IMU to optimize such as TOF, CDAF or PDAF in some The distance measurement effect in the scene.
例如,TOF需要配备专用的距离检测装置,成本较高;部分云台上没有设置该装置,需要新增相应的距离检测装置;TOF的帧率较低,如可以是10fps,可能导致一些关键帧缺失相机到目标间的相对距离变化量,无法满足跟焦或变焦场景下的需求。For example, TOF needs to be equipped with a dedicated distance detection device, which is costly; some gimbals do not have this device, and a corresponding distance detection device needs to be added; the frame rate of TOF is low, such as 10fps, which may cause some key frames The lack of the relative distance change between the camera and the target cannot meet the needs of focus or zoom scenarios.
例如,CDAF法与画面刷新频率相同,但需要消耗较多的计算资源;需要多帧收敛;并且有明显的呼吸效应,无法很好地满足一些场景下对跟焦或变焦的操作要求。For example, the CDAF method has the same refresh rate as the screen, but consumes more computing resources; requires multi-frame convergence; and has obvious breathing effects, which cannot well meet the operational requirements for focus or zoom in some scenarios.
例如,PDAF法与画面刷新频率相同,但对于光照强度有一定要求,无法满足光照不佳时跟焦或变焦场景下的需求。For example, the PDAF method has the same refresh rate as the screen, but it has certain requirements for light intensity, which cannot meet the needs of follow-focus or zoom scenes when the light is poor.
在基于IMU解算的拍摄装置的位置改变量优化诸如TOF、CDAF或PDAF等在一些场景下的测距效果,可以包括如下所示的操作。Optimizing the distance measurement effect in some scenarios such as TOF, CDAF or PDAF based on the position change of the camera device calculated by the IMU may include the following operations.
首先,对焦系统通过TOF、CDAF或PDAF等取得对焦框中各对象的合焦信息。假设目标不运动,或者拍摄者的运动占主要运动因素,此时,使用IMU或IMU和视觉惯性里 程计(Visual Inertial Odometry,简称VIO)获得高帧率的相机位置变化量。First, the focus system obtains the focus information of each object in the focus frame through TOF, CDAF, or PDAF. Assuming that the target does not move, or the movement of the photographer is the main movement factor, at this time, use the IMU or IMU and Visual Inertial Odometry (Visual Inertial Odometry, VIO for short) to obtain the camera position change at a high frame rate.
将计算得出的相机位置变化量,用于估算相机到目标间的相对距离变化量,用于对对焦系统的结果进行微调(如对缺失相机到目标间的相对距离变化量的关键帧的上一帧或之前最新的相对距离变化量进行微调,以预测与该关键帧对应的相机到目标间的相对距离变化量。The calculated camera position change is used to estimate the relative distance change between the camera and the target, and is used to fine-tune the results of the focusing system (such as the upper key frame for missing the relative distance change between the camera and the target) Fine-tune the latest relative distance change in one frame or before to predict the relative distance change between the camera and the target corresponding to the key frame.
下面给出距离计算原理。通过矢量旋转,将传感器坐标系下测量到的加速度值旋转到地理坐标系,如式(3)所示。The principle of distance calculation is given below. Through vector rotation, the acceleration value measured in the sensor coordinate system is rotated to the geographic coordinate system, as shown in formula (3).
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000002
其中,
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000003
是传感器系到地理系的旋转矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000004
是传感器系下的传感器测量向量。
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000005
是地理系下的传感器测量向量,当运动只包含平移时,减去重力加速度g,即得到平移的加速度。
in,
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000003
is the rotation matrix from the sensor frame to the geographic frame.
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000004
is the sensor measurement vector under the sensor system.
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000005
is the sensor measurement vector under the geographic system. When the motion only includes translation, subtract the gravitational acceleration g to obtain the translation acceleration.
当加速度计从静止开始积分时,初始速度vel(0)=0,移动速度如式(4)所示。When the accelerometer integrates from rest, the initial velocity vel (0) = 0, and the moving velocity is shown in formula (4).
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000006
其中acc为平移的加速度,vel为相机移动速度,相机到拍摄对象的距离可表示为如式(5)所示。Where acc is the acceleration of translation, vel is the moving speed of the camera, and the distance from the camera to the object can be expressed as shown in formula (5).
d=Δd+d 0      式(5) d=Δd+d 0 formula (5)
其中,Δd为位置变化量,
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000007
d 0为开始积分时相机到拍摄对象的距离,d为相机到拍摄对象的距离。通过加速度数据可以实时计算Δd,但初始距离和拍摄场景有关,可以通过如上所举的方法(TOF等)来确定。
Among them, Δd is the amount of position change,
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000007
d 0 is the distance from the camera to the subject when the integration starts, and d is the distance from the camera to the subject. The acceleration data can be used to calculate Δd in real time, but the initial distance is related to the shooting scene and can be determined by the methods mentioned above (TOF, etc.).
在物距d变化连续变化过程中,根据物距d进行合焦信息补偿,使得拍摄对象的图像清晰。During the continuous change of the object distance d, the focus information compensation is performed according to the object distance d, so that the image of the photographed object is clear.
物距d可由IMU获得的加速度积分两次得到。The object distance d can be obtained by integrating the acceleration obtained by the IMU twice.
例如,根据相似三角形可得像距f的表达式可以如式(6)所示。For example, the expression of the image distance f obtained from similar triangles can be shown in formula (6).
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2021103091-appb-000008
其中,frame_width是拍摄主体像宽,view_width是拍摄主体宽度,参考图6所示。Wherein, frame_width is the image width of the subject, and view_width is the width of the subject, as shown in FIG. 6 .
图18为本申请实施例提供的对合焦信息进行补偿的示意图。FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of compensating focus information provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图18所示,用户手持相机或承载有相机的云台对目标对象进行拍摄。在进入手动辅助对焦模式之后,可以在确定了目标对象的合焦焦距之后,再根据用户意愿对构图进行调整。如图18中,用户可以手持云台相对于拍摄对象进行横向和/或纵向移动,以优化构 图。但是,在用户相对于拍摄对象发生移动之后,会改变相机与拍摄对象之间的距离。如果仍然采用已有的合焦焦距进行拍摄,则可能导致拍摄的图像中针对拍摄对象的图像不清晰。因此,可以基于如上所示的方法,在用户相对于拍摄对象发生移动的过程中,对合焦信息进行补偿。例如,用户相对于拍摄对象远离了0.5米,则IMU会将检测到的0.5米发送给摄像控制部,由摄像控制部利用该0.5米对已有的用户与拍摄对象之间的距离进行补偿,然后基于补偿后的距离确定补偿后的合焦焦距,以实现对拍摄对象的合焦焦距的更新。需要说明的是,以上0.5米仅为便于理解本申请的方案,实际上IMU会按照预设周期输出相机的位移信息。As shown in FIG. 18 , a user holds a camera or a gimbal carrying a camera to shoot a target object. After entering the manual assisted focusing mode, after determining the in-focus focal length of the target object, the composition can be adjusted according to the user's wishes. As shown in Figure 18, the user can hold the pan-tilt to move horizontally and/or vertically relative to the subject to optimize the composition. However, after the user moves relative to the subject, the distance between the camera and the subject changes. If you still use the existing in-focus focal length to shoot, it may cause the image of the subject in the captured image to be unclear. Therefore, the in-focus information may be compensated during the process of the user moving relative to the object to be photographed based on the method described above. For example, if the user is 0.5 meters away from the subject, the IMU will send the detected 0.5 meters to the camera control unit, and the camera control unit will use the 0.5 meters to compensate the existing distance between the user and the subject. Then, the compensated in-focus focal length is determined based on the compensated distance, so as to update the in-focus focal length of the photographed object. It should be noted that the above 0.5 meters is only for the convenience of understanding the solution of this application. In fact, the IMU will output the displacement information of the camera according to the preset cycle.
通过如上方式即可及时地更新合集焦距等合焦信息。例如,当镜头机身发生水平移动情况,此时峰值基于IMU计算移动距离来追踪对焦目标,并补偿合焦强度曲线。例如,镜头机身发生相对于拍摄对象的移动时,此时可以基于IMU计算移动距离来补偿合焦强度曲线。Through the above method, the focus information such as the focal length of the collection can be updated in time. For example, when the lens body moves horizontally, the peak value calculates the moving distance based on the IMU to track the focus target and compensate the focus strength curve. For example, when the lens body moves relative to the subject, the IMU can be used to calculate the moving distance to compensate the in-focus intensity curve.
在某些实施例中,当前图像的对焦框中具有多个对象,每个对象与合焦信息集合中合焦信息之间存在第二对应关系。In some embodiments, there are multiple objects in the focus frame of the current image, and there is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the focus information in the focus information set.
相应地,基于合焦信息集合中合焦信息的改变量对合焦信息集合进行补偿可以包括如下操作。首先,确定至少一个对象的位姿变化信息。然后,基于至少一个对象的位姿变化信息和第二对应关系,对合焦信息集合中与至少一个对象各自对应的合焦信息进行补偿。其中,位姿变化信息可以包括:位置变化信息和/或姿态变化信息。Correspondingly, compensating the focus information set based on the change amount of the focus information in the focus information set may include the following operations. First, the pose change information of at least one object is determined. Then, based on the pose change information of the at least one object and the second corresponding relationship, the focus information corresponding to each of the at least one object in the focus information set is compensated. Wherein, the pose change information may include: position change information and/or attitude change information.
在某些实施例中,确定至少一个对象的位姿变化信息可以包括如下操作:首先,通过图像识别确定对焦框包括的至少一个对象,然后,通过图像处理确定对焦框包括的至少一个对象的位姿变化信息。通过图像识别得到对焦框中对象的图像,这样便于实现对象图像和合焦信息之间的绑定,以便对与对象图像对应的合焦信息进行更新。In some embodiments, determining the pose change information of at least one object may include the following operations: first, determine at least one object included in the focus frame through image recognition, and then determine the position of at least one object included in the focus frame through image processing Posture change information. The image of the object in the focus frame is obtained through image recognition, which facilitates the binding between the object image and the in-focus information, so as to update the in-focus information corresponding to the object image.
在某些实施例中,通过图像处理确定对焦框包括的至少一个对象的位姿变化信息可以包括如下操作,首先,计算至少一个对象的子图像在当前图像中的位移信息。然后,基于至少一个对象各自的合焦信息和至少一个对象在当前图像中的位移信息分别计算当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的位姿变化信息。其中,合焦信息可以包括合焦焦距等。例如,拍摄对象发生水平移动情况,此时可以基于视觉方式追踪拍摄对象,并结合镜头参数来计算移动距离,以补偿合焦强度曲线。In some embodiments, determining the pose change information of at least one object included in the focus frame through image processing may include the following operations. First, calculating displacement information of the sub-image of the at least one object in the current image. Then, based on the respective in-focus information of the at least one object and the displacement information of the at least one object in the current image, the pose change information for the at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is respectively calculated. Wherein, the in-focus information may include in-focus focal length and the like. For example, if the subject moves horizontally, the subject can be tracked visually, and the movement distance can be calculated in combination with lens parameters to compensate for the in-focus intensity curve.
例如,拍摄对象发生纵向移动时,相位模式下则可实时计算更新OSD和合焦强度曲线。反差模式下则无法精确补偿合焦强度曲线距离,可以提示用户切换至相位模式下进行 补偿,或者退出手动辅助对焦模式。For example, when the subject moves vertically, in the phase mode, the OSD and in-focus intensity curve can be calculated and updated in real time. In the contrast mode, it is impossible to accurately compensate the focus intensity curve distance, and the user can be prompted to switch to the phase mode for compensation, or exit the manual assisted focus mode.
图19为本申请另一实施例提供的对合焦信息进行补偿的示意图。FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of compensating focus information according to another embodiment of the present application.
如图19所示,相机在确定了与目标对象对应的合焦信息之后,相机没有发生移动,目标对象发生了相对于目标对象和相机连线方向的垂直方向的移动。在目标对象没有移动出对焦框的前提下,可以对目标对象的合焦信息进行补偿。例如,已知目标对象的合焦焦距,则可以基于合焦焦距确定物距d,然后,基于目标对象的图像在对焦框中的移动距离计算出目标对象的真实移动距离,这样就可以计算出移动后的目标对象与相机之间的距离d’。As shown in FIG. 19 , after the camera determines the in-focus information corresponding to the target object, the camera does not move, and the target object moves in a vertical direction relative to the direction connecting the target object and the camera. On the premise that the target object does not move out of the focus frame, the in-focus information of the target object can be compensated. For example, if the in-focus focal length of the target object is known, the object distance d can be determined based on the in-focus focal length, and then the real moving distance of the target object can be calculated based on the moving distance of the image of the target object in the focus frame, so that The distance d' between the moving target object and the camera.
本领域技术人员应当能明白的是,虽然以上实施例中给出了相机发生移动并且拍摄对象不移动时的合焦信息补偿方法,以及拍摄对象发生移动并且相机不移动时的合焦信息补偿方法。但是,同样可以适用于相机和拍摄对象都发生移动时的合焦信息补偿方法。例如,将以上两种方式的处理结果进行融合,即可适用于相机和拍摄对象都发生移动的场景。Those skilled in the art should be able to understand that although the above embodiments have given the focus information compensation method when the camera moves and the subject does not move, and the focus information compensation method when the subject moves and the camera does not move . However, the same can be applied to the focus information compensation method when both the camera and the subject are moving. For example, by combining the processing results of the above two methods, it can be applied to a scene where both the camera and the subject are moving.
在某些实施例中,对焦框包括多个对象,每个对象与合焦信息集合中合焦信息之间存在第二对应关系。In some embodiments, the focus frame includes multiple objects, and there is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the focus information in the focus information set.
相应地,基于合焦信息集合中合焦信息的改变量对合焦信息集合进行补偿可以包括如下操作。Correspondingly, compensating the focus information set based on the change amount of the focus information in the focus information set may include the following operations.
首先,确定镜头的位姿变化信息和对焦框包括的多个对象的位姿变化信息。First, the pose change information of the lens and the pose change information of multiple objects included in the focus frame are determined.
然后,基于镜头的位姿变化信息和对焦框包括的多个对象的位姿变化信息对合焦信息集合进行补偿。Then, the focus information set is compensated based on the pose change information of the lens and the pose change information of the multiple objects included in the focus frame.
本申请的实施例,用户在手动辅助对焦模式下既可以保留用户快速选择拍摄对象的灵活度,又可以实现快速高效的自动化对焦,而且可以在相机和被摄物体发生移动中仍然可以快速进行对焦,有效提升用户体验。In the embodiment of the present application, the user can not only retain the flexibility of the user to quickly select the subject in the manual assisted focusing mode, but also realize fast and efficient automatic focusing, and can still focus quickly when the camera and the subject are moving , effectively improving the user experience.
本申请的实施例,用户通过旋转镜头的对焦环或者其他选择按钮等方式,可以快速自动地根据已有合焦强度信息寻找最近对应合焦焦距进行变焦操作,有效提升了手动变焦的操作便捷度。In the embodiment of the present application, by rotating the focus ring of the lens or other selection buttons, the user can quickly and automatically find the closest corresponding focal length for zooming according to the existing focus strength information, which effectively improves the convenience of manual zooming .
本申请的实施例,提供了二维OSD的合焦峰值指示机制,便于用户直观地确定当前焦距和对焦框中对象的合焦焦距之间的关系,便于用户选取所需的合焦焦距。The embodiment of the present application provides a two-dimensional OSD in-focus peak indication mechanism, which facilitates the user to intuitively determine the relationship between the current focal length and the in-focus focal length of the object in the focus frame, and facilitates the user to select the desired in-focus focal length.
本申请的实施例,拍摄装置和/或拍摄对象发生运动的情况下,可以对对焦框中对象的合焦强度信息进行补偿,使得用户可以实现先对焦再构图的拍摄方式,并且无需在改变构图后再次进行对焦的操作,满足用户的多样化拍摄手法需求,并且提升对焦操作的便捷 度。In the embodiment of the present application, when the shooting device and/or the shooting object is in motion, the in-focus strength information of the object in the focus frame can be compensated, so that the user can realize the shooting method of focusing first and then composing the picture, and there is no need to change the composition Then perform the focusing operation again to meet the user's needs for diverse shooting techniques and improve the convenience of the focusing operation.
本申请的另一方面还提供了一种拍摄控制装置。Another aspect of the present application also provides a shooting control device.
图20为本申请实施例提供的拍摄装置的结构示意图。FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
拍摄装置2000承载有拍摄装置和惯性测量单元,惯性测量单元用于测量拍摄装置的姿态信息,如图20所示,拍摄装置2000包括:至少一个处理器2010和存储器2020。存储器2020存储计算机执行指令。The photographing device 2000 carries a photographing device and an inertial measurement unit, and the inertial measurement unit is used to measure attitude information of the photographing device. As shown in FIG. 20 , the photographing device 2000 includes: at least one processor 2010 and a memory 2020 . The memory 2020 stores computer-executable instructions.
至少一个处理器2010执行存储器2020存储的计算机执行指令,使得执行计算机执行指令时实现如下步骤:At least one processor 2010 executes the computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 2020, so that the following steps are implemented when executing the computer-executed instructions:
首先,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合。First, a collection of in-focus information for at least one object in the in-focus frame of the current image is acquired.
然后,获得第一操作,其中,第一操作包括变焦操作或者第一操作是针对合焦信息集合中的合焦信息。Then, a first operation is obtained, wherein the first operation includes a zoom operation or the first operation is directed to focus information in the focus information set.
接着,响应于第一操作,控制拍摄装置的镜头基于合焦信息集合自动对焦。Next, in response to the first operation, the lens of the photographing device is controlled to automatically focus based on the focus information set.
为了便于用户与云台之间进行交互,该拍摄装置上可以设置有输入部和/或输出部。In order to facilitate the interaction between the user and the pan/tilt, the photographing device may be provided with an input unit and/or an output unit.
例如,输入部可以用于输入用户对拍摄装置的操作指令,该输入部可以包括用于实现人机交互的转轮、按键和触控屏等。For example, the input unit may be used to input the user's operation instructions to the photographing device, and the input unit may include a rotary wheel, buttons, and a touch screen for realizing human-computer interaction.
具体地,该用于实现人机交互的部件可以包括显示屏,用于显示交互界面,用户可以在交互界面中输入控制指令。Specifically, the component for realizing human-computer interaction may include a display screen for displaying an interactive interface, and the user may input control instructions in the interactive interface.
例如,拍摄装置上还可以包括显示屏,用于显示用户交互界面。For example, the photographing device may further include a display screen for displaying a user interaction interface.
此外,该拍摄装置还可以进一步包括状态(模式)提示部件。例如,该拍摄装置可以包括指示灯。In addition, the photographing device may further include a state (mode) prompting component. For example, the photographing device may include an indicator light.
应理解,输入部除了可以包括用于实现人机交互的转轮以及按键之外,还可以具有其他部件或者部分,例如,可以具有拍摄装置的开关等。It should be understood that the input unit may include other components or parts besides the wheels and keys for realizing human-machine interaction, for example, it may have a switch of the camera, and the like.
输入部中可以设置处理器,用于对输入的控制指令进行处理,或者收发信号等。当然,处理器也可以设置于镜头中。A processor may be provided in the input part for processing input control instructions, or sending and receiving signals, and the like. Of course, the processor can also be arranged in the lens.
可选地,该处理器可以是中央处理单元(Central Processing Unit,简称CPU),该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,简称DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,简称ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(Field-Programmable Gate Array,简称FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。Optionally, the processor can be a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, referred to as CPU), and the processor can also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (Digital Signal Processor, referred to as DSP), application-specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuit (ASIC for short), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (Field-Programmable Gate Array, FPGA for short) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, or the processor may be any conventional processor, or the like.
处理单元可以与非易失性计算机可读存储介质2020连接。与非易失性计算机可读存储介质2020可以存储由处理单元所执行的逻辑、代码和/或者计算机指令2021,用于执行一个或者多个步骤。非易失性计算机可读存储介质2020可以包括一个或者多个存储单元(可去除的介质或者外部存储器,如SD卡或者RAM)。在某些实施例中,IMU的测量信息可以直接传送并存储到非易失性计算机可读存储介质2020的存储单元中。非易失性计算机可读存储介质2020的存储单元可以存储由处理单元所执行的逻辑、代码和/或者计算机指令2021,以执行本案描述的各种方法的各个实施例。例如,处理单元可以用于执行指令,以导致处理单元的一个或者多个处理器执行上述描述的变焦和/或跟焦功能。在某些实施例中,非易失性计算机可读存储介质2020的存储单元可以存储处理单元产生的处理结果。The processing unit can be connected with a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium 2020 . The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium 2020 may store logic, code and/or computer instructions 2021 executed by the processing unit for performing one or more steps. The non-volatile computer-readable storage medium 2020 may include one or more storage units (removable medium or external storage, such as SD card or RAM). In some embodiments, the measurement information of the IMU can be directly transmitted and stored in the storage unit of the non-volatile computer-readable storage medium 2020 . The storage unit of the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium 2020 may store logic, codes and/or computer instructions 2021 executed by the processing unit to perform various embodiments of the various methods described herein. For example, the processing unit may be configured to execute instructions to cause one or more processors of the processing unit to perform the zoom and/or focus functions described above. In some embodiments, the storage unit of the non-volatile computer-readable storage medium 2020 can store the processing results generated by the processing unit.
在某些实施例中,处理单元可以与控制模块连接,用以控制电机的状态。In some embodiments, the processing unit can be connected with the control module to control the state of the motor.
处理单元还可以与通讯模块连接,用以与一个或者多个外围设备(如终端、显示设备、或者其它远程控制设备)传送和/或者接收数据。这里可以利用任何合适的通讯方法,如有线通讯或者无线通讯。例如,通讯模块可以利用到一个或者多个局域网、广域网、红外线、无线电、Wi-Fi、点对点(P2P)网络、电信网络、云网络等。可选地,可以用到中继站,如信号塔、卫星、或者移动基站等。The processing unit can also be connected with the communication module to transmit and/or receive data with one or more peripheral devices (such as terminals, display devices, or other remote control devices). Any suitable communication method may be utilized here, such as wired communication or wireless communication. For example, the communication module may utilize one or more local area networks, wide area networks, infrared, wireless, Wi-Fi, peer-to-peer (P2P) networks, telecommunications networks, cloud networks, and the like. Optionally, relay stations, such as signal towers, satellites, or mobile base stations, may be used.
拍摄装置上的输入模块可以包括一个或者多个输入机制,以获取用户通过操作该输入模块产生的输入。输入机制包括一个或者多个操纵杆、开关、旋钮、滑动开关、按钮、拨号盘、触摸屏、小键盘、键盘、声音控制、手势控制、惯性模块等。输入模块可以用于获取用户的输入,该输入用于控制诸如相机、镜头或者其中部件的任何方面。The input module on the camera device may include one or more input mechanisms to obtain input generated by the user through operating the input module. Input mechanisms include one or more joysticks, switches, knobs, slide switches, buttons, dials, touch screens, keypads, keyboards, voice controls, gesture controls, inertial modules, and the like. An input module may be used to obtain user input for controlling any aspect such as a camera, lens, or components thereof.
处理单元可以与存储器连接。存储器包括易失性或者非易失性存储介质,用于存储数据,和/或处理单元可执行的逻辑、代码、和/或程序指令,用于执行一个或者多个规则或者功能。存储器可以包括一个或者多个存储单元(可去除的介质或者外部存储器,如SD卡或者RAM)。在某些实施例中,输入模块的数据可以直接传送并存储在存储器的存储单元中。存储器的存储单元可以存储由处理单元所执行的逻辑、代码和/或者计算机指令,以执行本案描述的各种方法的各个实施例。例如,处理单元可以用于执行指令,以导致处理单元的一个或者多个处理器处理及显示从拍摄装置或电机等获取的感应数据(如影像),基于用户输入产生的控制指令,包括运动指令及目标对象信息,并导致通讯模块传送和/或者接收数据等。存储单元可以存储感测数据或者从外部设备(如移动平台)接收的其它数据。在某些实施例中,存储器的存储单元可以存储处理单元生成的处理结果。The processing unit can be connected with the memory. The memory includes volatile or non-volatile storage media for storing data, and/or logic, codes, and/or program instructions executable by the processing unit for executing one or more rules or functions. The memory may include one or more storage units (removable media or external memory such as SD card or RAM). In some embodiments, the data input to the module can be directly transferred and stored in the storage unit of the memory. The storage unit of the memory may store logic, code and/or computer instructions executed by the processing unit to perform various embodiments of the various methods described herein. For example, the processing unit can be used to execute instructions to cause one or more processors of the processing unit to process and display sensing data (such as images) obtained from a camera or motor, and control instructions generated based on user input, including motion instructions and target object information, and cause the communication module to transmit and/or receive data, etc. The storage unit may store sensing data or other data received from an external device such as a mobile platform. In some embodiments, the storage unit of the memory may store the processing results generated by the processing unit.
在某些实施例中,合焦信息集合包括与镜头相关联的参数和合焦强度。In some embodiments, the set of focus information includes parameters and focus strength associated with the lens.
在某些实施例中,与镜头相关联的参数包括镜头的焦距和对焦距离,其中对焦距离为拍摄对象与镜头之间的距离。In some embodiments, the parameters associated with the lens include a focal length and a focus distance of the lens, wherein the focus distance is the distance between the subject and the lens.
具体内容参考前面的实施例的相同部分,此处不再做赘述。For specific content, refer to the same part of the previous embodiment, and details are not repeated here.
在某些实施例中,镜头包括变焦环。第一操作包括按照特定方向转动变焦环。In some embodiments, the lens includes a zoom ring. The first operation includes turning the zoom ring in a certain direction.
相应地,响应于第一操作,控制拍摄装置的镜头基于合焦信息集合自动对焦包括:重复以下操作直至将镜头的焦距改变为与目标对象对应的合焦焦距:响应于第一操作,控制镜头的焦距改变为合焦信息集合中目标焦距,目标焦距是以镜头的当前焦距为起始焦距,基于变焦环的转动方向信息在合焦信息集合中进行匹配确定的焦距。Correspondingly, in response to the first operation, controlling the lens of the photographing device to automatically focus based on the focus information set includes: repeating the following operations until the focal length of the lens is changed to a focus focal length corresponding to the target object: in response to the first operation, controlling the lens The focal length is changed to the target focal length in the focus information set. The target focal length is the focal length that is determined based on the current focal length of the lens and matched in the focus information set based on the rotation direction information of the zoom ring.
在某些实施例中,目标焦距包括以下任意一种:合焦信息集合中与镜头的当前焦距的差值最小的焦距、合焦信息集合中与镜头的当前焦距的差值最大的焦距。In some embodiments, the target focal length includes any one of the following: the focal length in the focus information set with the smallest difference from the current focal length of the lens, or the focal length in the focus information set with the largest difference from the current focal length of the lens.
在某些实施例中,计算机程序被处理时还用于:在获得第一操作的过程中或者之后,获得变焦环的转动量;基于镜头的当前焦距和变焦环的转动量确定辅助焦距;基于辅助焦距从合焦信息集合中确定目标焦距,其中,目标焦距是以辅助焦距为起始焦距,按照变焦环的转动方向信息在合焦信息集合中进行匹配,确定的与起始焦距最接近的焦距。In some embodiments, the computer program is processed to: obtain the rotation amount of the zoom ring during or after obtaining the first operation; determine the auxiliary focal length based on the current focal length of the lens and the rotation amount of the zoom ring; The auxiliary focal length determines the target focal length from the focus information set, wherein the target focal length is the auxiliary focal length as the initial focal length, and is matched in the focus information set according to the rotation direction information of the zoom ring, and the determined one is closest to the initial focal length focal length.
具体内容参考前面的实施例的相同部分,此处不再做赘述。For specific content, refer to the same part of the previous embodiment, and details are not repeated here.
在某些实施例中,拍摄装置包括显示屏,显示屏用于显示合焦信息集合中至少一个合焦信息,合焦信息包括合焦强度峰值。In some embodiments, the shooting device includes a display screen for displaying at least one focus information in the focus information set, and the focus information includes a focus intensity peak value.
在某些实施例中,显示屏还用于显示与合焦信息集合对应的输入组件;响应于第一操作,控制拍摄装置的镜头基于合焦信息集合自动对焦包括:响应于针对输入组件的用户操作,从合焦信息集合中确定与目标对象对应的目标对象焦距。In some embodiments, the display screen is also used to display an input component corresponding to the focus information set; in response to the first operation, controlling the lens of the camera to automatically focus based on the focus information set includes: responding to the user inputting the input component The operation is to determine the focal length of the target object corresponding to the target object from the in-focus information set.
在某些实施例中,显示屏还用于显示与合焦信息集合对应的合焦强度曲线。In some embodiments, the display screen is also used to display an in-focus intensity curve corresponding to the in-focus information set.
具体内容参考前面的实施例的相同部分,此处不再做赘述。For specific content, refer to the same part of the previous embodiment, and details are not repeated here.
在某些实施例中,合焦强度曲线通过如下方式生成:确定待显示合焦信息,待显示合焦信息是合焦信息集合中满足显示条件的焦距信息,显示条件包括与待显示合焦信息对应的合焦强度大于或等于预设强度阈值;基于待显示合焦信息生成合焦强度曲线。In some embodiments, the in-focus intensity curve is generated by determining the in-focus information to be displayed, the in-focus information to be displayed is the focal length information in the in-focus information set that satisfies the display conditions, and the display conditions include the in-focus information to be displayed The corresponding in-focus intensity is greater than or equal to a preset intensity threshold; an in-focus intensity curve is generated based on the in-focus information to be displayed.
在某些实施例中,获得第一操作包括以下至少一种:如果合焦信息集合中包括至少一个合焦信息,响应于变焦环的转动速度大于或等于预设转动速度阈值,获得自动变焦操作;或者如果合焦信息集合中包括至少一个合焦信息,响应于变焦环的转动持续时长大于或等于预设时长阈值,获得自动变焦操作;或者如果合焦信息集合中包括至少一个合焦信息, 响应于变焦环的转动速度大于或等于预设转动速度阈值,并且变焦环的转动持续时长大于或等于预设时长阈值,获得自动变焦操作。In some embodiments, obtaining the first operation includes at least one of the following: if the focus information set includes at least one focus information, in response to the rotation speed of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset rotation speed threshold, obtaining an automatic zoom operation ; or if at least one focus information is included in the focus information set, the automatic zoom operation is obtained in response to the rotation duration of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to the preset duration threshold; or if at least one focus information is included in the focus information set, In response to the rotation speed of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset rotation speed threshold, and the rotation duration of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset duration threshold, an automatic zoom operation is obtained.
在某些实施例中,合焦信息集合中至少一个合焦信息各自与对焦框中的子区域之间存在第一对应关系;第一操作包括子区域选取操作;响应于第一操作,控制拍摄装置的镜头基于合焦信息集合自动对焦包括:基于第一对应关系从合焦信息集合中确定与被选取的子区域对应的目标焦距;以及响应于目标焦距,控制拍摄装置的镜头基于目标焦距自动对焦。In some embodiments, there is a first corresponding relationship between at least one focus information in the focus information set and the sub-regions in the focus frame; the first operation includes a sub-region selection operation; in response to the first operation, control the shooting The automatic focusing of the lens of the device based on the focus information set includes: determining the target focal length corresponding to the selected sub-region from the focus information set based on the first correspondence; and in response to the target focal length, controlling the lens of the shooting device to automatically focus.
具体内容参考前面的实施例的相同部分,此处不再做赘述。For specific content, refer to the same part of the previous embodiment, and details are not repeated here.
在某些实施例中,获得第一操作包括:响应于针对对焦框中子区域的选取操作,确定被选取子区域;以及基于第一对应关系从合焦信息集合中确定与被选取子区域对应的目标焦距。In some embodiments, obtaining the first operation includes: determining the selected sub-region in response to the selection operation on the sub-region in the focus frame; and determining from the in-focus information set based on the first correspondence target focal length.
在某些实施例中,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合包括:响应于指示进入手动辅助对焦模式的第二操作,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合;或者响应于表征变焦趋势的第三操作,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合。In some embodiments, acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image includes: obtaining the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image in response to the second operation indicating to enter the manual assisted focus mode. A focus information set; or in response to a third operation representing a zoom trend, acquiring a focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image.
在某些实施例中,响应于指示进入手动辅助对焦模式的第二操作,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合包括:响应于第二操作,基于传感器获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合;和/或响应于第二操作,通过调整镜头的焦距,基于当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的像素反差,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合。In some embodiments, in response to the second operation indicating to enter the manual assisted focus mode, acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image includes: in response to the second operation, acquiring the focus information set of the current image based on the sensor A collection of in-focus information for at least one object in the focus frame; and/or in response to the second operation, by adjusting the focal length of the lens, based on the pixel contrast of the at least one object in the focus frame of the current image, acquire the focus frame of the current image A collection of in-focus information for at least one object.
具体内容参考前面的实施例的相同部分,此处不再做赘述。For specific content, refer to the same part of the previous embodiment, and details are not repeated here.
在某些实施例中,通过调整镜头的焦距,基于当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的像素反差,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合包括:在将镜头的焦距从第一预设焦距调整至第二预设焦距的过程中,获得多个拍摄面的图像信息;从多个拍摄面中确定合焦拍摄面,合焦拍摄面的图像信息中存在相邻像素反差超过预设反差阈值的像素;以及将至少部分与合焦拍摄面对应的合焦焦距和相应的合焦强度作为合焦信息。In some embodiments, by adjusting the focal length of the lens, based on the pixel contrast of the at least one object in the focus frame of the current image, obtaining the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image includes: In the process of adjusting the focal length from the first preset focal length to the second preset focal length, the image information of multiple shooting surfaces is obtained; the in-focus shooting surface is determined from the multiple shooting surfaces, and there are adjacent images in the image information of the in-focus shooting surface. A pixel whose pixel contrast exceeds a preset contrast threshold; and at least part of the in-focus focal length corresponding to the in-focus shooting surface and the corresponding in-focus intensity are used as in-focus information.
在某些实施例中,将镜头的焦距从第一预设焦距调整至第二预设焦距包括:将镜头的焦距从镜头的最小焦距调整至镜头的最大焦距。In some embodiments, adjusting the focal length of the lens from the first preset focal length to the second preset focal length includes: adjusting the focal length of the lens from the minimum focal length of the lens to the maximum focal length of the lens.
在某些实施例中,镜头包括变焦环;响应于表征变焦趋势的第三操作,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合包括:获取第三操作,第三操作使 得变焦环转动;响应于第三操作,将镜头的焦距从当前焦距调整至最大焦距或者最小焦距的过程中,获得多个拍摄面的图像信息;从多个拍摄面中确定合焦拍摄面,合焦拍摄面的图像信息中存在相邻像素反差超过预设反差阈值的像素;以及将至少部分合焦焦距和相应的合焦强度作为合焦信息。In some embodiments, the lens includes a zoom ring; in response to the third operation representing the zoom trend, acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image includes: acquiring the third operation, the third operation causes zooming The ring rotates; in response to the third operation, during the process of adjusting the focal length of the lens from the current focal length to the maximum focal length or the minimum focal length, image information of multiple shooting surfaces is obtained; determining the in-focus shooting surface from the multiple shooting surfaces, and achieving focus In the image information of the shooting surface, there are pixels whose adjacent pixel contrast exceeds a preset contrast threshold; and at least part of the in-focus focal length and corresponding in-focus intensity are used as in-focus information.
具体内容参考前面的实施例的相同部分,此处不再做赘述。For specific content, refer to the same part of the previous embodiment, and details are not repeated here.
在某些实施例中,获得第二操作包括以下至少一种:接收针对预设按键的操作、接收针对预设交互组件的操作或者接收预设操作手势。In some embodiments, obtaining the second operation includes at least one of the following: receiving an operation on a preset key, receiving an operation on a preset interactive component, or receiving a preset operation gesture.
在某些实施例中,获得第二操作包括:预设按键被按下第一指定位移时生成第二操作,其中,预设按键具有至少两个指定位移,第一指定位移是至少两个指定位移中的一个。In some embodiments, obtaining the second operation includes: generating the second operation when the preset key is pressed with a first specified displacement, wherein the preset button has at least two specified displacements, and the first specified displacement is at least two specified displacements. One of the displacements.
在某些实施例中,退出手动辅助对焦模式的条件包括以下至少一种:预设按键处于与退出手动辅助对焦模式对应的状态;目标对象移动至对焦框之外,其中,对焦框中具有多个对象,每个对象与合焦信息集合中合焦信息之间存在第二对应关系;拍摄装置仅能通过调整镜头确定对焦框的合焦信息,并且目标对象相对于镜头发生相向方向位移或者相背方向位移,其中,对焦框包括多个对象,每个对象与合焦信息集合中合焦信息之间存在第二对应关系。In some embodiments, the conditions for exiting the manual assisted focusing mode include at least one of the following: the preset button is in a state corresponding to exiting the manual assisted focusing mode; the target object moves out of the focus frame, wherein there are multiple There is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the focus information in the focus information set; the shooting device can only determine the focus information of the focus frame by adjusting the lens, and the target object is displaced in the opposite direction or relative to the lens. Displacement in the back direction, wherein the focus frame includes a plurality of objects, and there is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the focus information in the focus information set.
具体内容参考前面的实施例的相同部分,此处不再做赘述。For specific content, refer to the same part of the previous embodiment, and details are not repeated here.
在某些实施例中,基于合焦信息集合中合焦信息的改变量对合焦信息集合进行补偿包括:确定镜头的位姿变化信息;以及基于镜头的位姿变化信息对合焦信息集合进行补偿。In some embodiments, compensating the focus information set based on the change amount of the focus information in the focus information set includes: determining the pose change information of the lens; compensate.
在某些实施例中,当前图像的对焦框中具有多个对象,每个对象与合焦信息集合中合焦信息之间存在第二对应关系;基于合焦信息集合中合焦信息的改变量对合焦信息集合进行补偿包括:确定至少一个对象的位姿变化信息;以及基于至少一个对象的位姿变化信息和第二对应关系,对合焦信息集合中与至少一个对象各自对应的合焦信息进行补偿。In some embodiments, there are multiple objects in the focus frame of the current image, and there is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the focus information in the focus information set; based on the change amount of the focus information in the focus information set Compensating the focus information set includes: determining the pose change information of at least one object; and based on the pose change information of the at least one object and the second corresponding relationship, focusing information to compensate.
在某些实施例中,确定至少一个对象的位姿变化信息包括:通过图像识别确定对焦框包括的至少一个对象;以及通过图像处理确定对焦框包括的至少一个对象的位姿变化信息。In some embodiments, determining the pose change information of the at least one object includes: determining at least one object included in the focus frame through image recognition; and determining the pose change information of the at least one object included in the focus frame through image processing.
具体内容参考前面的实施例的相同部分,此处不再做赘述。For specific content, refer to the same part of the previous embodiment, and details are not repeated here.
在某些实施例中,对焦框包括多个对象,每个对象与合焦信息集合中合焦信息之间存在第二对应关系。相应地,基于合焦信息集合中合焦信息的改变量对合焦信息集合进行补偿包括:确定镜头的位姿变化信息和对焦框包括的多个对象的位姿变化信息; 以及基于镜头的位姿变化信息和对焦框包括的多个对象的位姿变化信息对合焦信息集合进行补偿。In some embodiments, the focus frame includes multiple objects, and there is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the focus information in the focus information set. Correspondingly, compensating the focus information set based on the change amount of the focus information in the focus information set includes: determining the pose change information of the lens and the pose change information of multiple objects included in the focus frame; The pose change information and the pose change information of multiple objects included in the focus frame are used to compensate the focus information set.
图21为本申请另一实施例提供的拍摄装置的结构示意图。FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing device provided by another embodiment of the present application.
如图21所示,拍摄装置,包括镜头和相机本体,用于在电机驱动镜头变焦或跟焦后,对拍摄对象进行拍摄获得图像。相机本体可以为手持单反或微单相机的相机本体。镜头是包括变焦环和跟焦环的镜头,如手动镜头。本实施例中的镜头也可以支持手动对焦、跟焦。As shown in FIG. 21 , the photographing device, including a lens and a camera body, is used to capture an object and obtain an image after the motor drives the lens to zoom or focus. The camera body may be a camera body of a handheld SLR or mirrorless camera. A lens is a lens that includes a zoom ring and a follow focus ring, such as a manual lens. The lens in this embodiment can also support manual focus and follow focus.
拍摄装置可以包括变焦环,变焦环与光学组件耦合,光学组件可以包括多个透镜,变焦环可用于调节光学组件的焦点。在一些实施例中,变焦环可以包括机械调节装置。当用户转动变焦环时,光学组件的焦点将随着变焦环的转动而改变。在另外一些实施例中,变焦环还可以包括一个或多个调节按钮或调整轮,调节按钮或调整轮可设置在光学组件或机身上,当用于按压调节按钮或转动调整轮时,拍摄装置将产生电信号,该电信号用于指示如何调整光学组件的焦点,例如如何调整光学组件中的一个或多个光学元件的转动方向和/或转动距离。该电信号可以指示安装在光学组件或机身上的电机转动以驱动光学组件聚焦。调节按钮或调整轮可以是机械的调节按钮或调整轮,也可以是显示屏上显示的虚拟的调节按钮或调整轮。The photographing device may include a zoom ring coupled to the optical assembly, the optical assembly may include a plurality of lenses, and the zoom ring may be used to adjust the focus of the optical assembly. In some embodiments, the zoom ring may include a mechanical adjustment device. When the user turns the zoom ring, the focus of the optical assembly will change as the zoom ring is turned. In some other embodiments, the zoom ring can also include one or more adjustment buttons or adjustment wheels, which can be set on the optical assembly or the body, and when used to press the adjustment button or turn the adjustment wheel, the shooting The device will generate electrical signals for instructing how to adjust the focus of the optical assembly, eg how to adjust the rotational direction and/or rotational distance of one or more optical elements in the optical assembly. The electrical signal can instruct a motor mounted on the optical assembly or the body to rotate to drive the optical assembly to focus. The adjustment button or adjustment wheel may be a mechanical adjustment button or adjustment wheel, or may be a virtual adjustment button or adjustment wheel displayed on a display screen.
在一些实施例中,拍摄装置还可以包括控制装置,控制装置可以设置在机身上,或者控制装置可以是机身的一部分。在一些实施例中,控制装置可以独立于机身,也可以和机身耦合。控制装置可以执行后续实施例的控制方法。控制装置包括存储器和处理器,存储器用于存储程序代码,处理器可以调用程序代码,当程序代码被执行时,处理器用于执行后续实施例的控制方法。In some embodiments, the photographing device may further include a control device, and the control device may be disposed on the body, or the control device may be a part of the body. In some embodiments, the control device can be independent from the fuselage, or can be coupled with the fuselage. The control device can execute the control methods of the subsequent embodiments. The control device includes a memory and a processor. The memory is used to store program codes. The processor can call the program codes. When the program codes are executed, the processor is used to execute the control methods of the subsequent embodiments.
存储器包括非随机的计算机可读存储介质,例如随机存取存储器(RAM)、只读存储器、闪速存储器、硬盘存储器或光介质等。处理器1084和/或处理器1164包括任何合适的硬件处理器,如微处理器、微控制器、一个中央处理单元(CPU),图形处理单元(GPU),网络处理器(NP)、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA),或其它可编程逻辑器件,分立门或晶体管逻辑器件,分立的硬件组件等。The memory includes non-random computer-readable storage media such as random access memory (RAM), read-only memory, flash memory, hard disk memory, or optical media, among others. Processor 1084 and/or processor 1164 include any suitable hardware processor, such as a microprocessor, a microcontroller, a central processing unit (CPU), a graphics processing unit (GPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal Processor (DSP), Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
拍摄装置还可以包括陀螺仪等传感器,用于确定相机与拍摄对象之间的距离。例如相机中设置有惯性测量单元IMU,IMU中包括加速度计,这样就可以根据加速度计输出的加速度计算相机发生的位移。The photographing device may also include sensors such as a gyroscope for determining the distance between the camera and the subject. For example, an inertial measurement unit (IMU) is provided in the camera, and the IMU includes an accelerometer, so that the displacement of the camera can be calculated according to the acceleration output by the accelerometer.
本申请的另一方面还提供了一种拍摄系统。Another aspect of the present application also provides a shooting system.
图22为本申请实施例提供的拍摄系统的结构示意图。FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图22所示,该拍摄系统可以包括拍摄装置以及支撑结构,支撑结构用于承载拍摄装置。该云台上可以用于承载拍摄装置。如拍摄装置可以通过结构固定(如通过拍摄装置固定机构进行固定)以可拆卸地方式设置在云台上。As shown in FIG. 22 , the photographing system may include a photographing device and a supporting structure, and the supporting structure is used to carry the photographing device. The cloud platform can be used to carry the photographing device. For example, the photographing device can be fixed on the platform in a detachable manner through structural fixation (such as being fixed by a photographing device fixing mechanism).
云台上可以设置有IMU。例如,IMU包括加速度计,从而对基于加速度计采集的加速度信息进行积分,得到速度信息,以及对速度信息进行积分,得到位移信息。IMU采集的测量信息可以包括不同采样时刻对应的拍摄装置发生的位置改变量。IMU与拍摄装置之间的距离差为一固定值,则可以将IMU与拍摄装置之间的距离改变量作为拍摄对象与拍摄装置之间的距离改变量。例如,IMU的基准面位于拍摄装置的下方。该位置改变量的计算处理可以通过IMU内的控制器或者通过电机内的控制器进行处理,本实施例对此不做限定。An IMU can be set on the gimbal. For example, the IMU includes an accelerometer, so that the acceleration information collected based on the accelerometer is integrated to obtain velocity information, and the velocity information is integrated to obtain displacement information. The measurement information collected by the IMU may include the amount of position change of the photographing device corresponding to different sampling moments. If the distance difference between the IMU and the photographing device is a fixed value, the distance change between the IMU and the photographing device may be used as the distance change between the subject and the photographing device. For example, the reference plane of the IMU is located below the camera. The calculation processing of the position change amount may be processed by a controller in the IMU or a controller in the motor, which is not limited in this embodiment.
可选地,该云台的拍摄装置固定机构可将电机和相机本体底部固定连接,镜头通过卡口安装到相机本体上。Optionally, the shooting device fixing mechanism of the pan/tilt can fixedly connect the motor to the bottom of the camera body, and the lens is mounted on the camera body through a bayonet.
该云台上可以设置跟焦轮和/或变焦轮,跟焦轮和/或变焦轮可以推送跟焦轮或变焦轮当前的转动位置和转动速度数据给拍摄装置,从而实现变焦或跟焦。此外,云台上可以设置有用于确定变焦环或跟焦环的电机,跟焦轮和/或变焦轮可以推送跟焦轮或变焦轮的当前的转动位置和转动速度等数据给电机,从而使电机转动到与跟焦轮或变焦轮相对应的指定位置。A focus wheel and/or a zoom wheel can be set on the pan/tilt, and the focus wheel and/or zoom wheel can push the current rotation position and speed data of the focus wheel or the zoom wheel to the shooting device, so as to achieve zooming or focus. In addition, a motor for determining the zoom ring or focus ring can be provided on the gimbal, and the focus wheel and/or zoom wheel can send data such as the current rotational position and rotational speed of the focus wheel or zoom wheel to the motor, so that The motor turns to the specified position corresponding to the focus wheel or the zoom wheel.
该云台上可以设置显示屏,在使用本申请实施例提供的控制方法中的跟焦或变焦过程中,用户还可以通过在显示屏输入控制指令进行模式选择,将自动模式切换到手动模式,或者从手动模式切换到手动辅助对焦模式,通过使用跟焦轮或变焦轮来控制电机的位置来实现跟焦或变焦。A display screen can be set on the pan/tilt, and during the focus or zoom process using the control method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the user can also switch the automatic mode to the manual mode by inputting a control command on the display screen to select a mode, Or switch from manual mode to manual assisted focus mode, and use the focus wheel or zoom wheel to control the position of the motor to achieve focus or zoom.
本领域技术人员应理解,上述对于拍摄系统各组成部分的命名仅是出于标志的目的,并不应理解为对本申请的实施例的限制。Those skilled in the art should understand that the foregoing naming of the components of the camera system is for identification purposes only, and should not be construed as limiting the embodiments of the present application.
其中,拍摄控制装置包括:至少一个处理器和存储器。Wherein, the shooting control device includes: at least one processor and memory.
存储器存储计算机执行指令。The memory stores computer-executable instructions.
至少一个处理器执行存储器存储的计算机执行指令,使得执行计算机执行指令时实现如上所示的至少部分步骤。At least one processor executes the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory, so that at least some of the steps shown above are implemented when the computer-executable instructions are executed.
可以理解,在某些实施例中,上述步骤也可以是分别由云台、拍摄装置配合完成,例如:It can be understood that, in some embodiments, the above steps can also be completed by the cooperation of the pan/tilt and the shooting device, for example:
在一个实施例中,云台通过惯性测量单元中加速度计的测量信息,确定云台承载的拍 摄装置在特定方向上的位置改变量;云台将位置改变量传输给相机,相机根据位置改变量更新与目标对象对应的合焦信息,镜头根据合焦焦距执行自动对焦。In one embodiment, the pan/tilt determines the position change amount of the camera carried by the pan/tilt in a specific direction through the measurement information of the accelerometer in the inertial measurement unit; the pan/tilt transmits the position change amount to the camera, and the camera determines the position change amount according to the Update the in-focus information corresponding to the target object, and the lens performs autofocus according to the in-focus focal length.
云台的通讯模块可以用于从一个或者多个远程设备(如移动平台、基站等)传送和/或者接收数据。例如,通讯模块可以传送控制信号(如运动信号、目标对象信息、追踪控制指令)给外围系统或者设备,如上述中对云台和/或负载。通讯模块可以包括传送器及接收器,分别用于从远程设备接收数据以及传送数据给远程设备。在某些实施例中,通讯模块可以包括收发器,其结合了传送器与接收器的功能。在某些实施例中,传送器与接收器之间以及与处理单元之间可以彼此通讯。通讯可以利用任何合适的通讯手段,如有线通讯或者无线通讯。The communication module of the pan/tilt can be used to transmit and/or receive data from one or more remote devices (such as mobile platforms, base stations, etc.). For example, the communication module can transmit control signals (such as motion signals, target object information, and tracking control instructions) to peripheral systems or devices, such as the above-mentioned centering platform and/or load. The communication module may include a transmitter and a receiver for receiving data from the remote device and transmitting data to the remote device, respectively. In some embodiments, the communication module may include a transceiver, which combines the functions of a transmitter and a receiver. In some embodiments, the transmitter and receiver can communicate with each other and with the processing unit. Communication may utilize any suitable means of communication, such as wired communication or wireless communication.
图22中所示的云台是手持式云台。此外,云台可以设置在移动平台上。The gimbal shown in Figure 22 is a handheld gimbal. In addition, the gimbal can be set on a mobile platform.
移动平台在运动过程中捕获的影像可以从移动平台或者影像设备传回给控制终端或者其它适合的设备,以显示、播放、存储、编辑或者其它目的。这样的传送可以是当影像设备捕获影像时,实时的或者将近实时的发生。可选地,影像的捕获及传送之间可以有延迟。在某些实施例中,影像可以存储在移动平台的存储器中,而不用传送到任何其它地方。用户可以实时看到这些影像,如果需要,调整目标对象信息或者调整移动平台或者其部件的其它方面。调整的目标对象信息可以提供给移动平台,重复的过程可能继续直到获得可想要的影像。在某些实施例中,影像可以从拍摄装置和/或控制终端传送给远程服务器。例如,影像可以在一些社交网络平台,如微信朋友圈或者微博上以进行分享。The images captured by the mobile platform during its movement can be transmitted back from the mobile platform or imaging device to the control terminal or other suitable devices for display, playback, storage, editing or other purposes. Such transmission may occur in real-time or near real-time as the imaging device captures the imagery. Optionally, there may be a delay between image capture and transmission. In some embodiments, the imagery may be stored in the memory of the mobile platform without being transmitted anywhere else. Users can view these images in real time and, if desired, adjust target object information or adjust other aspects of the mobile platform or its components. The adjusted target object information may be provided to the mobile platform, and the iterative process may continue until a desired image is obtained. In some embodiments, images may be transmitted from the camera and/or the control terminal to the remote server. For example, images can be shared on some social networking platforms, such as WeChat Moments or Weibo.
以下以手持相机为例,对上述各操作的执行主体进行示例性说明。例如,上述各操作的执行主体都可以是手持相机来实现,具体可以由相机的输入部、设置在相机中的处理器设置在镜头中的驱动器等实现对应的功能。Hereinafter, taking a hand-held camera as an example, the performing subject of each of the above operations will be exemplarily described. For example, each of the above operations can be performed by a hand-held camera. Specifically, the corresponding functions can be realized by an input unit of the camera, a processor installed in the camera, and a driver installed in the lens.
以下以手持云台为例,对上述各操作的执行主体进行示例性说明。例如,关于驱动镜片移动相关的操作可以由相机的镜头来执行。其余操作的执行主体都可以是相机或手持云台来实现,具体可以由手持云台的输入部、相机的处理器等实现对应的功能。The following takes the hand-held pan/tilt as an example to illustrate the execution subject of the above operations. For example, operations related to driving the lens to move can be performed by the lens of the camera. The rest of the operations can be performed by a camera or a handheld pan/tilt. Specifically, the corresponding functions can be realized by the input unit of the handheld pan/tilt, the processor of the camera, and the like.
例如,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合的操作可以由相机来执行。获得第一操作可以由相机或云台来执行。控制拍摄装置的镜头基于合焦信息集合自动对焦可以由相机来执行。For example, the operation of acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may be performed by the camera. The obtaining first operation may be performed by a camera or a gimbal. Controlling the automatic focusing of the lens of the shooting device based on the focus information set can be performed by the camera.
以下以移动平台机载的拍摄装置为例,对上述各操作的执行主体进行示例性说明。Hereinafter, taking the photographing device mounted on the mobile platform as an example, the execution subject of each of the above operations will be exemplarily described.
例如,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合的操作可以由相机来执行。获得第一操作可以由相机或移动平台的遥控器来执行。控制拍摄装置的镜头基于 合焦信息集合自动对焦可以由相机来执行。For example, the operation of acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image may be performed by the camera. The obtaining the first operation may be performed by a camera or a remote control of the mobile platform. Controlling the lens of the shooting device to automatically focus based on the focus information set can be performed by the camera.
需要说明的是,上述各操作的执行主体仅为示例性说明,不能理解为对本申请的限定,可以由移动平台、控制终端、拍摄装置其中的一个独立完成,或其中的几个配合完成。例如,对于移动平台是陆地机器人的情形下,可以在陆地机器人上设置人机交互模块(如包括用于显示人机交互界面的显示器等),用户可以直接在移动平台展示的交互界面上获取用户操作,以生成用户指令,确定目标对象的图像等。其中,独立完成包括主动或被动地、直接或间接地从其它设备获取相应数据以执行相应操作。It should be noted that the execution subject of the above operations is only an example and should not be construed as a limitation to the present application. It can be completed independently by one of the mobile platform, the control terminal, and the shooting device, or several of them cooperate. For example, in the case where the mobile platform is a land robot, a human-computer interaction module (such as a display for displaying the human-computer interaction interface, etc.) can be set on the land robot, and the user can directly obtain user information on the interactive interface displayed on the mobile platform. operations to generate user instructions, identify images of target objects, etc. Wherein, independent completion includes actively or passively, directly or indirectly acquiring corresponding data from other devices to perform corresponding operations.
本申请的实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,其包括计算机程序,该计算机程序包含用于执行本申请实施例所提供的方法的程序代码,当计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时,该程序代码用于使电子设备实现本申请实施例所提供的控制方法。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program, and the computer program includes program code for executing the method provided in the embodiment of the present application. When the computer program product is run on the electronic device, the The program code is used to enable the electronic device to implement the control method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
在该计算机程序被处理器执行时,执行本申请实施例的系统/装置中限定的上述功能。根据本申请的实施例,上文描述的系统、装置、模块、单元等可以通过计算机程序模块来实现。When the computer program is executed by the processor, the above-mentioned functions defined in the system/device of the embodiment of the present application are performed. According to the embodiments of the present application, the above-described systems, devices, modules, units, etc. may be implemented by computer program modules.
在一种实施例中,该计算机程序可以依托于光存储器件、磁存储器件等有形存储介质。在另一种实施例中,该计算机程序也可以在网络介质上以信号的形式进行传输、分发,并通过通信部分被下载和安装,和/或从可拆卸介质被安装。该计算机程序包含的程序代码可以用任何适当的网络介质传输,包括但不限于:无线、有线等等,或者上述的任意合适的组合。In one embodiment, the computer program may rely on tangible storage media such as optical storage devices and magnetic storage devices. In another embodiment, the computer program can also be transmitted and distributed in the form of a signal on a network medium, and downloaded and installed through the communication part, and/or installed from a removable medium. The program code contained in the computer program can be transmitted by any appropriate network medium, including but not limited to: wireless, wired, etc., or any appropriate combination of the above.
根据本申请的实施例,可以以一种或多种程序设计语言的任意组合来编写用于执行本申请实施例提供的计算机程序的程序代码,具体地,可以利用高级过程和/或面向对象的编程语言、和/或汇编/机器语言来实施这些计算程序。程序设计语言包括但不限于诸如Java,C++,python,“C”语言或类似的程序设计语言。程序代码可以完全地在用户计算设备上执行、部分地在用户设备上执行、部分在远程计算设备上执行、或者完全在远程计算设备或服务器上执行。在涉及远程计算设备的情形中,远程计算设备可以通过任意种类的网络,包括局域网(LAN)或广域网(WAN),连接到用户计算设备,或者,可以连接到外部计算设备(例如利用因特网服务提供商来通过因特网连接)。According to the embodiments of the present application, the program codes for executing the computer programs provided by the embodiments of the present application can be written in any combination of one or more programming languages, specifically, high-level process and/or object-oriented programming language, and/or assembly/machine language to implement these computing programs. Programming languages include, but are not limited to, programming languages such as Java, C++, python, "C" or similar programming languages. The program code can execute entirely on the user computing device, partly on the user device, partly on the remote computing device, or entirely on the remote computing device or server. In cases involving a remote computing device, the remote computing device may be connected to the user computing device through any kind of network, including a local area network (LAN) or a wide area network (WAN), or may be connected to an external computing device (e.g., using an Internet service provider). business to connect via the Internet).
以上为本申请的最优实施例,需要说明的,该最优的实施例仅用于理解本申请,并不用于限制本申请的保护范围。并且,最优实施例中的特征,在无特别注明的情况下,均同时适用于方法实施例和装置实施例,在相同或不同实施例中出现的技术特征在不相互冲突的情况下可以组合使用。The above is the best embodiment of the present application. It should be noted that the best embodiment is only used for understanding the present application, and is not used to limit the protection scope of the present application. Moreover, the features in the optimal embodiment are applicable to the method embodiment and the device embodiment at the same time unless otherwise specified, and the technical features appearing in the same or different embodiments can be used without conflicting with each other. Use in combination.
最后应说明的是:以上实施方式仅用以说明本申请的技术方案,而非对其进行限制;尽管参照前述实施方式对本申请已经进行了详细的说明,但本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述实施方式所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分或者全部技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请实施方式技术方案的范围。Finally, it should be noted that the above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present application, rather than limit them; although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand that: It is still possible to modify the technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments, or perform equivalent replacements for some or all of the technical features; and these modifications or replacements do not make the essence of the corresponding technical solutions depart from the scope of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application. .

Claims (38)

  1. 一种应用于拍摄装置的控制方法,包括:A control method applied to a shooting device, comprising:
    获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合;Obtain a collection of in-focus information for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image;
    获得第一操作,其中,所述第一操作包括变焦操作或者所述第一操作是针对所述合焦信息集合中的合焦信息;以及Obtaining a first operation, wherein the first operation includes a zoom operation or the first operation is directed to in-focus information in the in-focus information set; and
    响应于所述第一操作,控制所述拍摄装置的镜头基于所述合焦信息集合自动对焦。In response to the first operation, control the lens of the photographing device to automatically focus based on the focus information set.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述合焦信息集合包括与所述镜头相关联的参数和合焦强度。The method of claim 1, wherein the set of focus information includes parameters and focus strength associated with the lens.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述与所述镜头相关联的参数包括所述镜头的焦距和对焦距离,其中所述对焦距离为拍摄对象与所述镜头之间的距离。The method according to claim 2, wherein the parameters associated with the lens include a focal length and a focus distance of the lens, wherein the focus distance is a distance between a subject and the lens.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述镜头包括变焦环;The method of claim 1, wherein the lens includes a zoom ring;
    第一操作包括按照特定方向转动所述变焦环;The first operation includes turning the zoom ring in a particular direction;
    所述响应于所述第一操作,控制所述拍摄装置的镜头基于所述合焦信息集合自动对焦包括:重复以下操作直至将所述镜头的焦距改变为与目标对象对应的合焦焦距:响应于所述第一操作,控制所述镜头的焦距改变为所述合焦信息集合中目标焦距,所述目标焦距是以所述镜头的当前焦距为起始焦距,基于所述变焦环的转动方向信息在所述合焦信息集合中进行匹配确定的焦距。In response to the first operation, controlling the lens of the photographing device to automatically focus based on the focus information set includes: repeating the following operations until the focal length of the lens is changed to a focus focal length corresponding to the target object: Response In the first operation, controlling the focal length of the lens to change to the target focal length in the focus information set, the target focal length is based on the current focal length of the lens as the initial focal length, based on the rotation direction of the zoom ring The information is matched with the determined focal length in the in-focus information set.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其中,所述目标焦距包括以下任意一种:所述合焦信息集合中与所述镜头的当前焦距的差值最小的焦距、所述合焦信息集合中与所述镜头的当前焦距的差值最大的焦距。The method according to claim 4, wherein the target focal length includes any one of the following: the focal length in the focus information set with the smallest difference from the current focal length of the lens, the focal length in the focus information set with The focal length with the largest difference between the current focal lengths of the lens.
  6. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:在所述获得第一操作的过程中或者之后,获得所述变焦环的转动量;The method according to claim 4, wherein the method further comprises: obtaining the rotation amount of the zoom ring during or after the obtaining of the first operation;
    基于所述镜头的当前焦距和所述变焦环的转动量确定辅助焦距;determining an auxiliary focal length based on the current focal length of the lens and the rotation amount of the zoom ring;
    基于所述辅助焦距从所述合焦信息集合中确定目标焦距,其中,所述目标焦距是以所述辅助焦距为起始焦距,按照所述变焦环的转动方向信息在所述合焦信息集合中进行匹配,确定的与所述起始焦距最接近的焦距。Determine the target focal length from the focus information set based on the auxiliary focal length, wherein the target focal length is based on the auxiliary focal length as the starting focal length, according to the rotation direction information of the zoom ring in the focus information set Matching is carried out, and the determined focal length is the closest to the initial focal length.
  7. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述拍摄装置包括显示屏,所述显示屏用于显示所述合焦信息集合中至少一个合焦信息,所述合焦信息包括合焦强度峰值。The method according to claim 1, wherein the photographing device includes a display screen for displaying at least one focus information in the focus information set, and the focus information includes a focus intensity peak value.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其中,所述显示屏还用于显示与所述合焦信息集合对应的输入组件;The method according to claim 7, wherein the display screen is further used to display an input component corresponding to the focus information set;
    所述响应于所述第一操作,控制所述拍摄装置的镜头基于所述合焦信息集合自动对焦包括:In response to the first operation, controlling the lens of the photographing device to automatically focus based on the focus information set includes:
    响应于针对所述输入组件的用户操作,从所述合焦信息集合中确定与目标对象对应的目标对象焦距。In response to a user operation on the input component, a focal length of a target object corresponding to the target object is determined from the set of in-focus information.
  9. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其中,所述显示屏还用于显示与所述合焦信息集合对应的合焦强度曲线。The method according to claim 7, wherein the display screen is further used to display an in-focus intensity curve corresponding to the in-focus information set.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其中,所述合焦强度曲线通过如下方式生成:The method according to claim 9, wherein the in-focus intensity curve is generated in the following manner:
    确定待显示合焦信息,所述待显示合焦信息是所述合焦信息集合中满足显示条件的焦距信息,所述显示条件包括与所述待显示合焦信息对应的合焦强度大于或等于预设强度阈值;Determine the in-focus information to be displayed, the in-focus information to be displayed is the focal length information in the in-focus information set that meets the display conditions, and the display conditions include that the in-focus intensity corresponding to the in-focus information to be displayed is greater than or equal to preset intensity threshold;
    基于所述待显示合焦信息生成所述合焦强度曲线。The in-focus intensity curve is generated based on the in-focus information to be displayed.
  11. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 9, further comprising:
    显示当前焦距标志,所述当前焦距标志对应于所述合焦强度曲线中一个点;以及displaying a current focus indicator corresponding to a point in the in-focus intensity curve; and
    显示合焦提示信息,所述合焦提示信息包括所述当前焦距标志的显示状态改变信息。In-focus prompt information is displayed, and the in-focus prompt information includes display state change information of the current focus distance mark.
  12. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其中,所述获得第一操作包括以下至少一种:The method according to claim 4, wherein said obtaining the first operation comprises at least one of the following:
    如果所述合焦信息集合中包括至少一个合焦信息,响应于所述变焦环的转动速度大于或等于预设转动速度阈值,获得自动变焦操作;或者If the focus information set includes at least one focus information, in response to the rotation speed of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset rotation speed threshold, an automatic zoom operation is obtained; or
    如果所述合焦信息集合中包括至少一个合焦信息,响应于所述变焦环的转动持续时长大于或等于预设时长阈值,获得自动变焦操作;或者If the focus information set includes at least one focus information, in response to the rotation duration of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset duration threshold, an automatic zoom operation is obtained; or
    如果所述合焦信息集合中包括至少一个合焦信息,响应于所述变焦环的转动速度大于或等于预设转动速度阈值,并且所述变焦环的转动持续时长大于或等于预设时长阈值,获得自动变焦操作。If the focus information set includes at least one focus information, in response to the rotation speed of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset rotation speed threshold, and the rotation duration of the zoom ring being greater than or equal to a preset duration threshold, Get automatic zoom operation.
  13. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述合焦信息集合中至少一个合焦信息各自与所述对焦框中的子区域之间存在第一对应关系;所述第一操作包括子区域选取操作;The method according to claim 1, wherein there is a first corresponding relationship between at least one focus information in the focus information set and the sub-regions in the focus frame; the first operation includes sub-region selection operate;
    所述响应于所述第一操作,控制所述拍摄装置的镜头基于所述合焦信息集合自动对焦包括:In response to the first operation, controlling the lens of the photographing device to automatically focus based on the focus information set includes:
    基于所述第一对应关系从所述合焦信息集合中确定与被选取的子区域对应的目标焦距;以及determining a target focal length corresponding to the selected sub-region from the in-focus information set based on the first correspondence; and
    响应于所述目标焦距,控制所述拍摄装置的镜头基于所述目标焦距自动对焦。In response to the target focal length, controlling the lens of the photographing device to automatically focus based on the target focal length.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,还包括:在所述获得第一操作之前,显示与所述对焦框中至少部分子区域对应的合焦强度。The method according to claim 13, further comprising: before the acquiring the first operation, displaying the in-focus strength corresponding to at least some sub-regions in the focus frame.
  15. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其中,所述获得第一操作包括:The method of claim 13, wherein said obtaining the first operation comprises:
    响应于针对所述对焦框中子区域的选取操作,确定被选取子区域;以及In response to a selection operation on a sub-region in the focus frame, determine the selected sub-region; and
    基于所述第一对应关系从所述合焦信息集合中确定与所述被选取子区域对应的目标焦距。A target focal length corresponding to the selected sub-region is determined from the focus information set based on the first correspondence.
  16. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein said obtaining the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image comprises:
    响应于指示进入手动辅助对焦模式的第二操作,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合;或者In response to the second operation indicating to enter the manual assisted focus mode, acquire a focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image; or
    响应于表征变焦趋势的第三操作,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合。In response to the third operation representing the zoom trend, a set of focus information for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is acquired.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其中,所述响应于指示进入手动辅助对焦模式的第二操作,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合包括:The method according to claim 16, wherein, in response to the second operation indicating to enter the manual auxiliary focus mode, acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image comprises:
    响应于所述第二操作,基于传感器获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合;和/或In response to the second operation, acquiring a set of focus information for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image based on the sensor; and/or
    响应于所述第二操作,通过调整镜头的焦距,基于所述当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的像素反差,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合。In response to the second operation, by adjusting the focal length of the lens, based on the pixel contrast of the at least one object in the focus frame of the current image, a set of focus information for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is acquired.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其中,所述基于传感器获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合包括:The method according to claim 17, wherein the sensor-based acquisition of the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image comprises:
    通过传感器按照预设采样周期获取与所述当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象各自的合焦焦距,其中,基于所述合焦焦距进行拍摄的图像满足预设成像条件;以及Acquiring in-focus focal lengths for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image through the sensor according to a preset sampling period, wherein the image captured based on the in-focus focal length satisfies preset imaging conditions; and
    将至少部分合焦焦距和与所述至少部分合焦焦距各自对应的合焦强度信息作为所述合焦信息。At least part of the in-focus focal lengths and in-focus intensity information corresponding to the at least part of the in-focus focal lengths are used as the in-focus information.
  19. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其中,所述通过调整镜头的焦距,基于所述当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的像素反差,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合包括:The method according to claim 17, wherein, by adjusting the focal length of the lens, based on the pixel contrast of at least one object in the focus frame of the current image, the focus of at least one object in the focus frame of the current image is acquired Information collections include:
    在将镜头的焦距从第一预设焦距调整至第二预设焦距的过程中,获得多个拍摄面的图像信息;In the process of adjusting the focal length of the lens from the first preset focal length to the second preset focal length, image information of multiple shooting surfaces is obtained;
    从所述多个拍摄面中确定合焦拍摄面,所述合焦拍摄面的图像信息中存在相邻像素反差超过预设反差阈值的像素;以及Determining an in-focus shooting surface from the plurality of shooting surfaces, where there are pixels whose adjacent pixel contrast exceeds a preset contrast threshold in the image information of the in-focus shooting surface; and
    将至少部分与所述合焦拍摄面对应的合焦焦距和相应的合焦强度作为所述合焦信息。The in-focus focal length and the corresponding in-focus intensity at least partly corresponding to the in-focus shooting surface are used as the in-focus information.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其中,所述将镜头的焦距从第一预设焦距调整至第二预设焦距包括:将所述镜头的焦距从所述镜头的最小焦距调整至所述镜头的最大焦距。The method according to claim 19, wherein said adjusting the focal length of the lens from a first preset focal length to a second preset focal length comprises: adjusting the focal length of the lens from the minimum focal length of the lens to the minimum focal length of the lens maximum focal length.
  21. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其中,所述镜头包括变焦环;The method of claim 16, wherein the lens includes a zoom ring;
    所述响应于表征变焦趋势的第三操作,获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合包括:In response to the third operation of characterizing the zoom trend, acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image includes:
    获取第三操作,所述第三操作使得所述变焦环转动;obtaining a third operation that causes the zoom ring to rotate;
    响应于所述第三操作,将所述镜头的焦距从当前焦距调整至最大焦距或者最小焦距的过程中,获得多个拍摄面的图像信息;In response to the third operation, during the process of adjusting the focal length of the lens from the current focal length to the maximum focal length or the minimum focal length, image information of multiple shooting surfaces is obtained;
    从所述多个拍摄面中确定合焦拍摄面,所述合焦拍摄面的图像信息中存在相邻像素反差超过预设反差阈值的像素;以及Determining an in-focus shooting surface from the plurality of shooting surfaces, where there are pixels whose adjacent pixel contrast exceeds a preset contrast threshold in the image information of the in-focus shooting surface; and
    将至少部分合焦焦距和相应的合焦强度作为所述合焦信息。At least part of the focus distance and the corresponding focus strength are used as the focus information.
  22. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其中,获得所述第二操作包括以下至少一种:接收针对预设按键的操作、接收针对预设交互组件的操作或者接收预设操作手势。The method according to claim 16, wherein obtaining the second operation comprises at least one of the following: receiving an operation on a preset key, receiving an operation on a preset interactive component, or receiving a preset operation gesture.
  23. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其中,获得所述第二操作包括:预设按键被按下第一指定位移时生成所述第二操作,其中,所述预设按键具有至少两个指定位移,所述第一指定位移是所述至少两个指定位移中的一个。The method according to claim 16, wherein obtaining the second operation comprises: generating the second operation when a preset key is pressed with a first specified displacement, wherein the preset key has at least two specified displacements , the first specified displacement is one of the at least two specified displacements.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,还包括:在所述预设按键被按下第一指定位移之后,The method according to claim 23, further comprising: after the preset key is pressed for a first specified displacement,
    获得第四操作,所述第四操作是所述预设按键被按下第二指定位移,其中,所述第一指定位移和所述第二指定位移分别是所述至少两个指定位移中的一个;以及Obtaining a fourth operation, the fourth operation is a second specified displacement of the preset button being pressed, wherein the first specified displacement and the second specified displacement are respectively the two specified displacements of the at least two specified displacements. one; and
    响应于所述第四操作,采集图像信息。In response to the fourth operation, image information is acquired.
  25. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,还包括:在获得所述第二操作之后,The method of claim 23, further comprising: after obtaining the second operation,
    如果确定满足退出手动辅助对焦模式的条件,则退出所述手动辅助对焦模式。If it is determined that the condition for exiting the manual assisted focusing mode is met, the manual assisted focusing mode is exited.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法,其中,退出所述手动辅助对焦模式的条件包括以下至少一种:The method according to claim 25, wherein the conditions for exiting the manual assisted focusing mode include at least one of the following:
    所述预设按键处于与退出手动辅助对焦模式对应的状态;The preset button is in a state corresponding to exiting the manual auxiliary focus mode;
    目标对象移动至所述对焦框之外,其中,所述对焦框中具有多个对象,每个对象与所述合焦信息集合中合焦信息之间存在第二对应关系;The target object moves out of the focus frame, wherein there are multiple objects in the focus frame, and there is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the focus information in the focus information set;
    所述拍摄装置仅能通过调整镜头确定对焦框的合焦信息,并且目标对象相对于所述镜头发生相向方向位移或者相背方向位移,其中,所述对焦框包括多个对象,每个对象与所述合焦信息集合中合焦信息之间存在第二对应关系。The shooting device can only determine the in-focus information of the focus frame by adjusting the lens, and the target object is displaced in the opposite direction or in the opposite direction relative to the lens, wherein the focus frame includes a plurality of objects, and each object is related to the There is a second corresponding relationship between focus information in the focus information set.
  27. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,还包括:在所述获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合之后,The method according to claim 1, further comprising: after acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image,
    基于所述合焦信息集合中合焦信息的改变量对所述合焦信息集合进行补偿。The in-focus information set is compensated based on a change amount of the in-focus information in the in-focus information set.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,其中,所述基于所述合焦信息集合中合焦信息的改变量对所述合焦信息集合进行补偿包括:The method according to claim 27, wherein the compensating the focus information set based on the change amount of the focus information in the focus information set comprises:
    确定所述镜头的位姿变化信息;以及determining the pose change information of the lens; and
    基于所述镜头的位姿变化信息对所述合焦信息集合进行补偿。The focus information set is compensated based on the pose change information of the lens.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的方法,其中,所述确定所述镜头的位姿变化信息包括:The method according to claim 28, wherein said determining the pose change information of the lens comprises:
    基于惯性测量单元确定所述镜头的位姿变化信息,所述位姿变化信息包括位移信息和角度变化信息中至少一种。The pose change information of the lens is determined based on an inertial measurement unit, and the pose change information includes at least one of displacement information and angle change information.
  30. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,其中,所述当前图像的对焦框中具有多个对象,每个对象与所述合焦信息集合中合焦信息之间存在第二对应关系;The method according to claim 27, wherein there are multiple objects in the focus frame of the current image, and there is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the focus information in the focus information set;
    所述基于所述合焦信息集合中合焦信息的改变量对所述合焦信息集合进行补偿包括:The compensating the in-focus information set based on the change amount of the in-focus information in the in-focus information set includes:
    确定至少一个所述对象的位姿变化信息;以及determining pose change information of at least one of the objects; and
    基于至少一个所述对象的位姿变化信息和所述第二对应关系,对所述合焦信息集合中与至少一个所述对象各自对应的合焦信息进行补偿。Based on the pose change information of at least one of the objects and the second corresponding relationship, the focus information corresponding to each of the at least one of the objects in the focus information set is compensated.
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的方法,其中,所述确定至少一个所述对象的位姿变化信息包括:The method according to claim 30, wherein said determining at least one pose change information of said object comprises:
    通过图像识别确定所述对焦框包括的至少一个对象;以及determining at least one object included in the focus frame through image recognition; and
    通过图像处理确定所述对焦框包括的至少一个对象的位姿变化信息。The pose change information of at least one object included in the focus frame is determined by image processing.
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其中,所述通过图像处理确定所述对焦框包括的至少一个对象的位姿变化信息包括:The method according to claim 31, wherein the determining the pose change information of at least one object included in the focus frame through image processing comprises:
    计算至少一个所述对象的子图像在所述当前图像中的位移信息;以及calculating displacement information of at least one sub-image of said object in said current image; and
    基于至少一个所述对象各自的合焦信息和至少一个所述对象在所述当前图像中的位移信息分别计算所述当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的位姿变化信息。Calculating pose change information for the at least one object in the focus frame of the current image based on the in-focus information of the at least one object and the displacement information of the at least one object in the current image.
  33. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,其中,所述对焦框包括多个对象,每个对象与所述合焦信息集合中合焦信息之间存在第二对应关系;The method according to claim 27, wherein the focus frame includes a plurality of objects, and there is a second corresponding relationship between each object and the in-focus information in the in-focus information set;
    所述基于所述合焦信息集合中合焦信息的改变量对所述合焦信息集合进行补偿包括:The compensating the in-focus information set based on the change amount of the in-focus information in the in-focus information set includes:
    确定所述镜头的位姿变化信息和所述对焦框包括的多个对象的位姿变化信息;以及determining pose change information of the lens and pose change information of a plurality of objects included in the focusing frame; and
    基于所述镜头的位姿变化信息和所述对焦框包括的多个对象的位姿变化信息对所述合焦信息集合进行补偿。The focus information set is compensated based on the pose change information of the lens and the pose change information of a plurality of objects included in the focus frame.
  34. 根据权利要求1至33任一项所述的方法,在所述获取当前图像的对焦框中针对至少一个对象的合焦信息集合之后,还包括:According to the method according to any one of claims 1 to 33, after acquiring the focus information set for at least one object in the focus frame of the current image, further comprising:
    通过传感器更新所述对焦框的合焦信息。The focus information of the focus frame is updated by the sensor.
  35. 根据权利要求1至33任一项所述的方法,其中,所述合焦信息以合焦强度曲线的形式进行显示,所述合焦强度曲线所在的二维坐标系包括表征焦距的第一坐标轴和表征合焦强度的第二坐标轴。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 33, wherein the in-focus information is displayed in the form of an in-focus intensity curve, and the two-dimensional coordinate system where the in-focus intensity curve is located includes the first coordinate representing the focal length axis and a second axis representing the in-focus intensity.
  36. 一种拍摄装置,包括:A photographing device, comprising:
    镜头,用于采集图像;A lens for collecting images;
    一个或多个处理器;one or more processors;
    存储装置,用于存储一个或多个计算机程序,所述计算机程序在被所述处理器执行时,实现根据权利要求1~35中任一项所述的方法。A storage device for storing one or more computer programs which, when executed by the processor, implement the method according to any one of claims 1-35.
  37. 一种拍摄系统,包括:A camera system, comprising:
    如权利要求36所述的拍摄装置;以及The photographing device as claimed in claim 36; and
    支承机构,其支承所述拍摄装置。A support mechanism supports the photographing device.
  38. 一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储一个或多个计算机程序,所述计算机程序在被所述处理器执行时,实现根据权利要求1~35中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium for storing one or more computer programs which, when executed by the processor, implement the method according to any one of claims 1-35.
PCT/CN2021/103091 2021-06-29 2021-06-29 Control method, image capture apparatus, and image capture system WO2023272485A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202180095735.5A CN117015975A (en) 2021-06-29 2021-06-29 Control method, shooting device and shooting system
PCT/CN2021/103091 WO2023272485A1 (en) 2021-06-29 2021-06-29 Control method, image capture apparatus, and image capture system

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2021/103091 WO2023272485A1 (en) 2021-06-29 2021-06-29 Control method, image capture apparatus, and image capture system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023272485A1 true WO2023272485A1 (en) 2023-01-05

Family

ID=84690182

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/103091 WO2023272485A1 (en) 2021-06-29 2021-06-29 Control method, image capture apparatus, and image capture system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117015975A (en)
WO (1) WO2023272485A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117528246A (en) * 2024-01-04 2024-02-06 杭州星犀科技有限公司 Automatic focusing triggering method, system, terminal and medium

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20030156216A1 (en) * 2002-02-19 2003-08-21 Osamu Nonaka Picture taking apparatus having focusing device
JP2005114901A (en) * 2003-10-06 2005-04-28 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Projection type video display device
JP2006133566A (en) * 2004-11-08 2006-05-25 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Camera device, method of controling same, remote device and camera system
JP2007271983A (en) * 2006-03-31 2007-10-18 Casio Hitachi Mobile Communications Co Ltd Imaging device and program
CN105917639A (en) * 2013-11-15 2016-08-31 福瑞佛克斯系统有限公司 Location-tag camera focusing systems
CN107370936A (en) * 2016-05-12 2017-11-21 青岛海信宽带多媒体技术有限公司 Zooming method and zoom lens control device
CN109076164A (en) * 2016-04-18 2018-12-21 月光产业股份有限公司 Focus pulling is carried out by means of the range information from auxiliary camera system
CN111277758A (en) * 2020-02-25 2020-06-12 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Photographing method, terminal and computer-readable storage medium

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20030156216A1 (en) * 2002-02-19 2003-08-21 Osamu Nonaka Picture taking apparatus having focusing device
JP2005114901A (en) * 2003-10-06 2005-04-28 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Projection type video display device
JP2006133566A (en) * 2004-11-08 2006-05-25 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Camera device, method of controling same, remote device and camera system
JP2007271983A (en) * 2006-03-31 2007-10-18 Casio Hitachi Mobile Communications Co Ltd Imaging device and program
CN105917639A (en) * 2013-11-15 2016-08-31 福瑞佛克斯系统有限公司 Location-tag camera focusing systems
CN109076164A (en) * 2016-04-18 2018-12-21 月光产业股份有限公司 Focus pulling is carried out by means of the range information from auxiliary camera system
CN107370936A (en) * 2016-05-12 2017-11-21 青岛海信宽带多媒体技术有限公司 Zooming method and zoom lens control device
CN111277758A (en) * 2020-02-25 2020-06-12 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Photographing method, terminal and computer-readable storage medium

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117528246A (en) * 2024-01-04 2024-02-06 杭州星犀科技有限公司 Automatic focusing triggering method, system, terminal and medium
CN117528246B (en) * 2024-01-04 2024-04-16 杭州星犀科技有限公司 Automatic focusing triggering method, system, terminal and medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117015975A (en) 2023-11-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10116922B2 (en) Method and system for automatic 3-D image creation
US11860511B2 (en) Image pickup device and method of tracking subject thereof
US9001255B2 (en) Imaging apparatus, imaging method, and computer-readable storage medium for trimming and enlarging a portion of a subject image based on touch panel inputs
US9025044B2 (en) Imaging device, display method, and computer-readable recording medium
CN108603997B (en) Control device, control method, and control program
JP5738657B2 (en) Imaging device
JP2012186612A (en) Imaging device
RU2635873C2 (en) Method and device for displaying framing information
WO2023272485A1 (en) Control method, image capture apparatus, and image capture system
WO2022151473A1 (en) Photographing control method, photographing control apparatus and gimbal assembly
EP3076660B1 (en) Method and apparatus for displaying framing information
US10248859B2 (en) View finder apparatus and method of operating the same
KR101814714B1 (en) Method and system for remote control of camera in smart phone
WO2022109860A1 (en) Target object tracking method and gimbal
JPWO2018168228A1 (en) Image processing apparatus, image processing method, and image processing program
JP5281904B2 (en) Viewfinder system and imaging apparatus having the same
WO2023106118A1 (en) Information processing device, information processing method, and program
WO2023072030A1 (en) Automatic focusing method and apparatus for lens, and electronic device and computer-readable storage medium
US20220385830A1 (en) Electronic apparatus, control method, and non-transitory computer readable medium
JP2012227717A (en) Display device, display program, and display method
JP2018017748A (en) Control device, imaging device, lens device, imaging system, control method, program, and storage medium
JP2024017297A (en) Imaging devices, wearable devices, control methods, programs and systems
JP2015165698A (en) Portable device, display method, and program
JP2016208204A (en) Method and apparatus for picture imaging, and program
JP2023093075A (en) Remote operation system, electronic apparatus, control method for remote operation system, program, and storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202180095735.5

Country of ref document: CN

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE